Renegade
OWNER’S MANUAL
2019
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................117
5
SAFETY ........................................................................145
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................229
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................365
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................429
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................489
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................501
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................571
12
INDEX..........................................................................577
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION .........................4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............5
▫ Essential Information ......................5
▫ Symbols ...............................5
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING .....................5
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................6
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .....6
1
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
perform tasks that are not intended for conventional pas-
senger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from
many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so
take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If
equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was
designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for
off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this
vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar
with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for brak-
ing, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting.
Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When
driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the
vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws
of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and
local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of
this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips”
in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer
oriented documents. In the attached Warranty Booklet you
will find a description of the services that FCA offers to its
customers, the Warranty Certificate and the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
take the time to read all of these publications carefully
before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the
instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warn-
ings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable
operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
4 INTRODUCTION
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
If applicable, refer to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for
related information.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Rollover Warning Label
6 INTRODUCTION
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Engine Compartment 4 — Wheel / Tire
2 — Headlight 5 — Exterior Mirror
3 — Windshield 6 — Door
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Light
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate Handle
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch 6 — Speed Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 7 — Switch Panel
3 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 8 — Uconnect System
4 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Controls
5 — Windshield Wiper Lever (Behind Steering Wheel) 10 — Glove Compartment
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Door Handles 4 — Selec-Terrain Switch
2 — Door Locks / Window Switches 5 — Gear Selector
3 — Seats 6 — AUX Jack
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS .................................17
▫ Key Fob With Remote Control ..............17
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................23
▫ Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry ................................23
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .24
▫ How To Use Remote Start..................25
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped ....26
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode ................26
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle ...............................26
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ...............................27
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .27
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer And Rear
Defrost Activation — If Equipped ...........27
▫ General Information .....................27
䡵 SENTRY KEY ............................28
▫ Key Programming ......................28
▫ Replacement Keys .......................28
▫ General Information .....................29
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .29
▫ To Arm The System .....................30
▫ To Disarm The System ...................30
▫ Disabling .............................31
䡵 DOORS ...............................31
▫ Manual Door Locks ......................31
▫ Power Door Locks ......................32
3
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry —
If Equipped ...........................33
▫ Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature —
If Equipped ...........................38
▫ Dead Lock Device — If Equipped ............38
▫ Child Locks ...........................39
䡵 SEATS ................................40
▫ Manual Front Seats ......................41
▫ Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ...............42
▫ Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped ......44
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ................46
▫ Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 ........47
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................48
▫ Front Head Restraints ....................48
▫ Rear Head Restraints .....................49
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................50
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............50
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.........50
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................51
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ..................51
▫ Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .........52
▫ Outside Mirrors ........................52
▫ Folding Mirror .........................54
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............54
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .....55
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................55
▫ Headlights ............................55
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .56
▫ High Beams ...........................56
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................56
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........57
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped .............................57
▫ Parking Lights .........................58
▫ Headlight Delay ........................58
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .............58
▫ Turn Signals ...........................59
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................59
▫ Courtesy Lights .........................59
▫ Cargo Area Lights .......................64
䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS ...................64
▫ Front Wiper Operation ....................64
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..........65
▫ Rear Wiper Operation ....................67
▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ......68
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................69
▫ Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Passenger
Compartment ..........................70
▫ Manual Climate Controls Overview ..........71
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview .........75
▫ Operating Tips .........................83
䡵 WINDOWS .............................85
▫ Power Window Controls ..................85
▫ Auto-Down Feature .....................86
▫ Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection — If
Equipped .............................87
▫ Reset Auto-Up..........................87
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................88
䡵 POWER MY SKY SUN ROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . .88
▫ Power My Sky Operation ..................88
▫ Emergency Open/Close ...................90
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................91
䡵 POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE
— IF EQUIPPED .........................92
▫ Opening .............................93
▫ Closing ..............................93
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................93
▫ Power Sun Shade........................93
▫ Auto Reverse Feature .....................94
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ....................94
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
䡵 HOOD ................................95
▫ To Open The Hood ......................95
▫ To Close The Hood ......................96
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................97
▫ Opening .............................97
▫ Closing ..............................98
▫ Cargo Area Features......................99
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ..................105
▫ Glove Compartment .....................105
▫ Sun Visors ...........................106
▫ Power Outlets .........................108
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped .............109
▫ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ...............110
▫ Ashtray — If Equipped ...................111
▫ Front Armrest .........................112
▫ Cupholders ...........................113
▫ Handle Grip ..........................114
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......114
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
Key Fob With Remote Control
The key fob with Remote Control contains a Remote
Keyless Entry feature. The Remote Keyless Entry system
allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key fob. The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Key Fobs
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring
to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of
the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if
equipped, the security alarm will arm.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Key Fob Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
located in “Multimedia” for further programmable infor-
mation.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically
if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, other-
wise the doors will stay locked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for fur-
ther information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and pull the emergency key out with your other
hand.
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emer-
gency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and
gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
Emergency Key Removal
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Separating Case With A Coin Key Fob Battery Replacement
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System ser-
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the
vehicle locks.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IGNITION SWITCH
Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The push button ignition has three operating positions. The
three positions are OFF, ON, and RUN.
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• No electrical devices are available.
ON
• The vehicle is not running.
• Some electrical devices are available
START/STOP Ignition Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Al-
ways remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting The
Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328ft (100m).
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic trans-
mission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within
five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third
time shuts the engine off.
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monox-
ide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp. Then
the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the igni-
tion must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
disable the one time push of the remote start button for two
seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via
the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
cluster display until you push the ignition START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically activate
when ambient temperature is less than 40° F (4.4° C). These
features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Multimedia⬙ for further
information.
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer And Rear
Defrost Activation — If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer and the Rear Defrost will be enabled. Exiting
remote start will resume previous operation, except if the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer timer and operation will continue.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in ⬙Multimedia⬙ for further
information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key
fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Programming
Key fob programming is performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
• The horn will pulse.
• The turn signals will flash.
• The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the “OFF”
mode.
2.
Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know
Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to unlock the door,
refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to disarm the
system.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during lift-
gate entry. If someone enters the vehicle through the
liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm, regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Disabling
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of long
inactivity of the car), lock the doors by turning the vehicle
key in the exterior door lock cylinder.
NOTE: If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the event
of a failure to the system or to switch off the alarm, place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock button on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the doors, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the lock symbol is no longer visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
All doors and the tailgate can be programmed to unlock on
the use of one of the front door interior handles. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion on programming locking and unlocking preferences.
Locking/Unlocking Doors From Outside
With the doors closed, insert the key blade into the driver
exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the right to lock the
driver’s door.
To unlock the driver’s door, insert the key blade into the
driver exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the left to
unlock the driver’s door.
NOTE: The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door separately.
Manual Door Lock
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always make
sure the ignition is in “OFF” mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors, liftgate and fuel door.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system if equipped.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” of “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If
Equipped
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehi-
cle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle, and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm
will arm.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automati-
cally.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does not find
any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are met:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Electronic
Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the
right of electronic liftgate release.
NOTE:
• The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock the
liftgate and the doors. The liftgate unlock feature is built
into the Electronic Liftgate release.
•
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in the
instrument cluster display, if equipped, only the liftgate
will unlock when you push the Electronic Release. If
⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in
Uconnect, the liftgate will unlock when you push the
electronic unlock/lock button on the liftgate. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door
If the key fob battery is low or dead, the emergency key can
be used to unlock the driver side door lock cylinder.
To release the emergency key, proceed as follows:
1. Slide the emergency key release button to the side.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob with
Remote Control housing.
NOTE: The Emergency Key can be inserted into the door
lock cylinder from either direction.
Liftgate Release/Passive Entry
1 — Liftgate Handle
2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location
Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be severely
injured or killed. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A
child could start the vehicle, operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause them to be severely injured or killed
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when any door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
and in PARK.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped
The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that prevents the
use of the internal door handles of the vehicle and the
power door lock switch.
This device prevents the doors from opening within the
passenger compartment.
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Arming The Dead Lock Device
• The device works on all doors and requires two presses
of the lock button on the key fob. For vehicles equipped
with Passive Entry, the device will also work by pushing
the lock button on the driver’s or passenger’s side
exterior door handle.
• The arming of the device is indicated by three flashes of
the direction indicators.
• The device does not operate if one or more doors are not
properly closed.
Disarming The Device
• The device will automatically disarm by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob. For vehicles equipped
with Passive Entry, the device will also disarm by using
the driver’s or passenger’s side exterior door handle to
unlock and open the door.
• Placing the ignition in the ON or RUN position.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the lock
or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged,
that door can only be opened by using the outside door
handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
only be opened by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make certain
it is in the desired position.
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
lock/unlock dial to the unlocked position, roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Front Seats
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar
is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. While
sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recline Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Manual Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Split Rear Seats
The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat which increases
the storage of the rear cargo area.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
• Prior to folding the rear seat, you must secure the rear
armrest in the upright position.
• You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply opening the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Enlargement
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional
storage in the rear cargo area.
Proceed as follows:
1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
2. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat.
3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both sides of the
rear seatbacks completely forward.
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area allows you to
carry a single passenger on the right side of the rear seat,
while the enlargement of the right side allows you to carry
two passengers.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer to “Remov-
able Rear Shelf” in “Cargo Area Features” for details.
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat
and rest them on the seat belt guide.
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left or right
rear seatback completely forward.
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty return-
ing the seat to its proper position.
1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt guides on the top
edge of the seat to ensure the seatbacks properly latch.
Rear Seat Release
1 — Seatback Release Lever
2 — Seat Belt Guide
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until they lock on
both the latches. Verify the red notches are no longer
visible on the release lever. If the red notches are visible,
the seatback is not secure.
Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped
The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of
the seat, close to the floor.
Use the switch to move the seat up/down, forward/
rearward, tilt (if equipped) and to set the angle of the
seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Rear Seat Latch
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
3 — Power Lumbar Switch
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch; the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down — If Equipped
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar Adjustment— If Equipped
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or de-
crease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
NOTE: Power seat adjustments are only allowed when the
ignition device is turned to ON, and for about 30 minutes
after it is turned to OFF.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat buttons are located in your vehicle’s
touchscreen.
You can choose between two heating levels:
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to LO-level after approximately 145 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 60 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, when turning
on the vehicle the driver’s heated seat will automatically
turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40
Tilt the head restraint forward and pull the rear armrest tab
to release it from the seat and pull forward.
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as rear
armrest with cupholders.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Rear Seat Center Armrest — If Equipped
Rear Armrest
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and passenger
head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Rear Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head restraints
and one center head restraint for its rear passengers. The
rear head restraints can be raised or lowered. When the
center seat is being occupied, the head restraint should be
in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the
center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for maximum
visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
located at the base of the head restraint, and push down-
ward on the head restraint.
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see an authorized
dealer.
Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping
lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/
telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel switch
has been turned on, it will stay
on for an average of 80 minutes or more before auto-
matically shutting off. This time will vary based on
environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel
can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering
wheel is already warm. The heated steering wheel
control button is located in your vehicle’s touchscreen.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, when turning
on the vehicle the heated steering wheel will automatically
turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you
can be reduced by moving the lever under the mirror to the
night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the lever under the mirror is set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
NOTE: The mirror will automatically release in the event
of heavy contact with a passenger.
Mirror Adjustment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the
button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving
in REVERSE.
Outside Mirrors
Power Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
panel.
To adjust the mirror, rotate the mirror selection switch to
the left or to the right and then push the mirror adjustment
switch in the four directions indicated by arrows.
NOTE:
• To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in the
RUN position.
• The power mirror switches will remain active for up to
three minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
• Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the
neutral position to avoid accidental movements.
Dimming Mirror
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
To adjust the exterior mirrors, push the corners of the
mirrors till desired alignment is obtained.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Power Folding Mirror Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3 — Mirror Selector Switch
Manual Adjustment Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Folding Mirror
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rear-
ward.
Power Folding/Unfolding Mirrors — If Equipped
Push the mirror fold/unfold switch briefly to fold or
unfold the exterior mirrors.
To fold or unfold the exterior mirrors, the ignition must be
in the RUN position.
NOTE: The fold/unfold mirrors switch will remain active
for up to three minutes after the ignition is cycled to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
Rear Window Defroster.
Folding Exterior Mirror
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn the light off.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the opera-
tion of the headlights, side marker lights, daytime running
lights, fog lights and the dimming of the instrument cluster
and interior lighting.
Vanity Mirror
1 — Mirror Light
2 — Mirror Cover
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 — Push Fog Light Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument
cluster and the controls located on the instrument panel.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when the
engine is started and remain on unless the headlights are
turned on or the engine is shut off.
The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal operation
and resume operation when the turn signal operation has
ended.
High Beams
To turn on the high beam headlights, push the turn signal
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) and an
indicator will illuminate in the cluster. To turn off the high
beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward (toward the rear
of the vehicle).
NOTE: The headlights must be on for the high beams to
activate.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent
(AUTO position) for automatic headlight operation. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on.
This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds
after you place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn
the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
Refer to “Headlight Delay” in this section for more infor-
mation.
NOTE: The ignition must be in the RUN or START position
before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED, located
on the windshield. It detects changes in light intensity
outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity of light set by
using the menu on the display or on the Uconnect system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of external
light required for controlling the lighting.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera de-
tects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• The multifunction lever must be in the high beam
position in order to activate the Automatic High Beams.
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
When set to AUTO, the system automatically turns the
headlights on or off based on ambient light levels.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Parking Lights
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch to the
first detent (parking position) to turn on the parking lights.
The parking light indicator in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
Headlight Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable between
0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Headlight Delay Activation
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within two minutes. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off from the “Low
beam” position.
If the headlight switch is in AUTO position and headlights
were on before the ignition is OFF, the delay interval begins
automatically.
Headlight Delay Deactivation
The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the
parking lights or by placing the ignition in the RUN
position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within two minutes
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the fog
light button on the headlight switch. To turn off the front
fog lights, push the fog light button on the headlight switch
a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam
headlights will turn off the fog lights.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the turn
signal indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a
turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal
is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
Interior Lights Dimmer Switch
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, lower
instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby
bin lights.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the instru-
ment panel dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the instrument panel.
The instrument panel dimmer has two position at the top
of the thumb wheel. The first detent position puts the
interior lighting into daytime mode and at the very top
detent position will illuminate all the interior lights. At the
bottom detent position of the of the instrument panel
dimmer, the internal backlights to their lowest dimmable
setting and disable the interior lights.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Front Lights
The courtesy lights are mounted between the sun visors
above the rear view mirror. The light switches are used to
turn the lights on or off.
Headlight Switch
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
Courtesy Lights
1 — Driver’s Courtesy Lights
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or
passenger light switch.
NOTE:
• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
• If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
after approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in the
OFF position.
Courtesy Light Switches
1— Left Switch
2— Right Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Rear Lights
Push the button on the rear dome light once to turn the
light on, the light will remain on at all times. Push the
button a second time to turn the light off, the lights will
remain off at all times.
Vehicles With Retractable Roof
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there are two
interior lights located above the grab handles of the rear
doors.
Rear Dome Light
Rear Interior Light
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The lights come on by opening any of the doors.
Dome Light Timing
The Dome Light will automatically illuminate when the
doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or after the doors
are closed.
Timing Entering The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
• When the doors are unlocked, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
• When one of the doors is opened, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately three minutes.
• When the doors are closed, the dome light will automati-
cally shut off after approximately 27 seconds.
The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the RUN or
ON position.
The dome light will turn off under any of the following
conditions:
• The dome light is disabled when the ignition is placed in
the RUN or ON position.
• The dome lights will turn off automatically when the
doors are locked.
• The dome lights will automatically turn off after ap-
proximately fifteen minutes of inactivity to preserve the
battery.
Interior Light Locations
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome light will illuminate under the following condi-
tions when the ignition is placed to the OFF position and
the key is removed:
• The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
• The opening of one of the doors (approximately three
minutes).
• After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).
The dome light timing is disabled when the doors are
locked.
Cargo Area Lights
One interior light is located in the cargo area on the
driver’s side trim panel.
This light automatically turns on/off when the liftgate is
opened and closed, regardless of the position of the ignition.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
lever on the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Front Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the two detent
positions for intermittent settings, the third detent for low
wiper operation and the fourth for high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Stalk
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn
off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the wind-
shield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
Use this feature when weather conditions make occasional
usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to
the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and auto-
matically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of the two detent positions
for intermittent settings, to activate this feature.
NOTE: If the end of the multifunction lever rotates from off
to the first intermittent setting or from the first intermittent
setting to the second intermittent setting, the wipers will
perform a round up to clean the windshield.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
This function can be activated or deactivated by the
Uconnect Settings through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in the “Multimedia” for further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most sensi-
tive. Place the wiper switch in the off position when not
using the system.
Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition
When the user switches the ignition from OFF to RUN or
START with the lever already in the intermittent position,
no wipe cycle is performed for safety reasons. This tempo-
rary inhibition avoids accidental activations of the wiping
(e.g during the hand washing of the windscreen, blocking
the blades in ice/snow conditions). The user can activate
the Rain Sensing Wipers in three ways:
• Moving the level in off position and then in Intermittent
positions.
• One MIST command actuation.
• The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and the rain
sensor detects the presence of rain.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with automatic transmission,
the Rain Sensing Wipers will become inactive even if the
lever is in one of the intermittent positions if the vehicle is
placed in NEUTRAL and the vehicle speed is less than
3 mph (5 km/h). This prevents damage to the windshield
wipers during an automatic car wash.
Rain Sensor
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Wiper Operation
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the lever on
the right side of the steering column. The rear wiper/
washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
NOTE: If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is
shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one round
up to clean the rear window.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. If the
front wiper is set to Automatic Mode (on the wiper stalk as
well as “Enabled” through Uconnect settings), placing the
rear wiper in an intermittent position will cause the front
and rear wipers to sync up. Turning the front wipers off
will cause the rear wipers to also stop.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the lever is
released, the pump will resume normal operation.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located with
the Climate Controls on the instrument panel. Push
this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster auto-
matically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To
manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second
time.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, when turning
on the vehicle the driver’s heated seat will automatically
turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be activated automatically in the case of a
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and the ambient temperature is
below 40° F (4.4° C).
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Remote
Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is
less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
will be enabled. Upon exiting remote start mode the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will remain on. Remote Start
Operation can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
Auto-On Rear Window Defroster/Windshield Wiper De-
Icer — If Equipped
When turning the vehicle ON, the Rear Window Defroster
and Windshield Wiper De-Icer will automatically turn on
when the outside ambient temperature is less than 40° F
(4.4° C).
The Rear Window Defroster and Windshield Wiper De-Icer
automatically turn off after approximately 20 minutes. To
manually shut the defroster/windshield off, push the
button a second time.
Auto On can be enabled or disabled. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Passenger
Compartment
Left Side Air Outlets
1 — Adjustable Air Outlet
2 — Air Vane Adjustment
3 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
4 — Fixed Air Outlet
Center Air Outlets
1 — Fixed Air Outlet
2 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
3 — Air Vane Adjustment
4 — Adjustable Air Outlet
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Controls Overview
Right Side Air Outlets
1 — Fixed Air Outlet
2 — Adjustable Air Outlet
3 — Air Vane Adjustment
4 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
Manual Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Push the button to turn on the
MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to de-
sired user settings.
A/C Button
Push the button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Condition-
ing system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the
system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fog-
ging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist out-
lets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on.
Temperature Control
Push these buttons to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment.
Pushing the blue arrow indicates cooler temperatures, while pushing the red button indicates
warmer temperatures.
Blower Control
Rotate the control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any
mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the “0” (OFF) posi-
tion.
Mode
Mode Button
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost
indicator light on the instrument panel turning on.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster
heating filaments do not affix stickers or other objects
to the inside of the rear glass.
Air Recirculation
Push and release the Air Recirculation button so that the
LED is on, to enter recirculation mode. It is recommended
to turn the internal air recirculation on while standing in
traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted
air.
Do not use the function for a long period of time, particu-
larly if there are many passengers in the vehicle, to prevent
the windows from misting up.
NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach
the required heating or cooling conditions quickly depend-
ing on the mode selected. Do not use the internal air
recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of the windows mist-
ing.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on at
least once a month for approximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer before
the summer.
NOTE: This AC system uses R1234yf Refrigerant.
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Push the button to turn on the
MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to de-
sired user settings.
NOTE: The MAX A/C button is only on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Push the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the
A/C is ON. Pushing the AUTO control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO
mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change
the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recir-
culation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Icon Description
AUTO Button
Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting air-
flow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls
to change between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within
this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illu-
minates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist out-
lets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mir-
rors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control
Push these buttons to regulate the temperature of the driver and passenger settings indepen-
dently. Pushing the blue arrow indicates cooler temperatures, while pushing the red button indi-
cates warmer temperatures.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indica-
tor is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger tem-
perature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature set-
ting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: The SYNC button is only on the touchscreen.
Mode Button
Mode Button
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the
compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the
button turning on).
The system remembers that the compressor has been
turned off, even after the engine has stopped.
Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO MODE (AUTO
LED will turn off). To restore automatic control of compres-
sor, push the AUTO button again.
NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced
to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower
than the outside temperature. Under certain environmental
conditions, windows could fog rapidly since the air is not
dehumidified.
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost Function)
Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED on) the
windshield and side window demisting function.
The Climate Control system carries out the following
operations:
• Turns on the air conditioning compressor when environ-
mental conditions are suitable.
• Turns air recirculation off.
• Sets blower fan to the maximum speed.
• Directs air flow to windshield and front side window
diffusers.
When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons are
pushed, the Climate Control system will deactivate the
Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield dis-
tribution activates the Climate Control system compressor
and the air recirculation is set to outside air intake.
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows.
Max-defrost is also available in manual mode.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost
indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. If
equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster
heating filaments do not affix stickers or other objects
to the inside of the rear glass.
Turning Off The Climate Control System
Push the ON/OFF button.
With the Climate Control system off:
• Air recirculation is on, isolating the passenger compart-
ment from the outside.
• The A/C compressor is off.
• The blower is off.
• The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated.
NOTE: The Climate Control unit stores the temperatures
set before the system was turned off and restores them
when one of the following knobs/buttons is pushed:
• A/C
• Recirculation
• Max Defrost
• Blower Increase
• AUTO
To restart the Climate Control system in fully automatic
mode, push the AUTO button.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on at
least once a month for approximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership
before the summer.
NOTE: This AC system uses R1234yf Refrigerant.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC panel. The
system regulates the amount of airflow.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, and passenger tem-
peratures. Once the desired temperature is displayed,
the system will achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing
the front blower knob setting.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The power window switch is located on the driver’s door
panel. The driver’s power window switch controls the
operation of all the windows.
Power Window Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Front Window
2 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Rear Window
3 — Window Lockout Switch (Rear Doors)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ON or RUN position.
NOTE:
• If the Remote Start functionality is active, it is not
possible to move any windows.
• The power window switches will remain active for up to
three minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Push the Window Lockout switch to disable rear passenger
window controls. When this feature is active, the LED light
will illuminate and only the driver can operate the rear
passenger windows. To undo this feature, push the switch
again and the LED will turn off.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the front and
rear passenger doors window switches have an Auto-
Down feature.
Push the window switch down for half a second and
release. The window will go down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the
switch briefly.
To open the window part way (manually), push the
window switch down briefly and release.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection — If
Equipped
The driver door power window switch and the front
passenger door window switch have an Auto-Up feature.
Pull the window switch up, for about half a second, and
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
To close the window part way (manually), pull the window
switch up briefly and release it.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch and hold to close
the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER MY SKY SUN ROOF — IF EQUIPPED
Power My Sky Operation
Open/Close The Front Panel
The power My Sky switches are located on the overhead
console. The switches are used to open and close the front
panel.
Front Panel Operation Switch
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To automatically retract the front panel to the open posi-
tion, push the open/close button and release. From the
fully open position, pull the open/close switch and release.
The front panel will close completely.
To stop the movement of the front panel during automatic
closing or opening, briefly push the open/close switch.
Venting The Front Panel
To vent the front panel push and release the vent switch.
During the vent operation any push on the open/close
switch will stop the closing of the panel.
NOTE:
• If the My Sky is in open position, the vent switch must
be held until the panel vents.
• The power roof controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON or RUN position.
• If the Remote Start functionality is active, it will not be
possible to move the roof.
Auto-Reverse Feature
The front panel of the retractable roof is equipped with a
auto-reverse safety system that is able to detect the pres-
ence of an obstacle during the opening and closing motion
of the panel.
When this event occurs, the front panel stops and reverses
immediately.
NOTE: With both panels removed the retractable roof
cannot be opened or closed.
Operation Switch
1 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
2 — Front Panel Vent Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Sunroof Reinitialization
The following procedure must be followed to reinitialize
the sunroof and calibrate obstacle detection:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
2. Push and hold the front panel close switch until the
sunroof panel is fully closed, then release the switch.
3. Open the driver side front door.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. After 10 seconds, place the ignition back in the RUN
position.
6. Push and hold the front panel close switch again. The
reinitialization process will begin within 10 seconds. Do
not release the switch.
7. The sunroof will stop and an audible “click” will be
heard.
8. Release the front panel close switch, then push and hold
it again within 5 seconds. Do not release the switch.
9. As the front panel close switch is held, the sunroof panel
will cycle to the fully open position and then back to the
fully closed position again.
10. Once all sunroof motion has stopped, release the front
panel close switch. Sunroof reinitialization and ob-
stacle calibration is now complete.
NOTE: If the switch is released prior to the sunroof
completing the above procedure, the entire process must be
repeated.
Emergency Open/Close
If the Power My Sky switch fails, the retractable roof can be
operated manually as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap located on the inner lining.
2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that is supplied in
the tool bag in the cargo area.
3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the key hole
and turn it clockwise to open the roof or counter-
clockwise to close.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When refitting panels, be careful to avoid fingers,
scarves, ties and items of clothing from getting
caught under the panels themselves.
• Do not open the roof in the presence of snow or ice.
There is risk of damage.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Emergency Key And Key Hole
1 — Key Hole
2 — Allen Key
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE
— IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof while
operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening. In-
jury may result.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Sunshade Open/Close
2 — Power Sunroof Open/Close
3 — Venting Sunroof
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening
Opening Sunroof
To retract the sunroof to the open position, push the
Open/Close switch and the sunroof will fully open. The
sunroof can be stopped in any position by pushing/pulling
the switch a second time while is opening.
Venting Sunroof
To vent the sunroof push the Vent switch.
NOTE: The vent switch has the automatic function only at
the opening of the sunroof. During the closing of the
sunroof, the switch must be held until closed.
Closing
Closing Sunroof
To close the sunroof completely, pull the Open/Close
switch and the sunroof will fully close. The sunroof can be
stopped in any position by pushing/pulling the switch a
second time while it is closing.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Shade
Opening Power Shade — Automatic Mode
Push the shade switch for about one-half second and the
shade will automatically open. During the automatic open
operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade part way (manually), push the shade
switch briefly and release.
Closing Power Shade — Automatic Mode
Pull the shade switch for about one-half second and the
shade will automatically close. During the automatic close
operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop the
shade.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade part way (manually), pull the shade
switch briefly and release.
NOTE:
• The sunroof and the shade controls will operate only
when the ignition is in the ON or RUN position.
• If the Remote Start functionality is active, it is not
possible to move the sunroof.
Auto Reverse Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during the Automatic Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof
will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof. Never
leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly un-
attended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are prop-
erly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the
glass panel.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
latch release lever toward the passenger side of the
vehicle. The hood release lever is located behind the
center front edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch
1 — Safety Latch Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert it
into the seat located on the underside of the hood. Be sure
the rod is locked into position.
To Close The Hood
Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the other hand,
remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert it into the
locking tab.
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
Locking Tab
Support Rod And Seat
1 — Support Rod
2 — Support Rod Seat
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the power
door lock switches located on the driver door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic liftgate release
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
Electronic Liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the Liftgate, push the Electronic
Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Handle Location
1 — Liftgate Handle
2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Emergency Opening
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
2. Fold the rear seats forward.
3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under cargo
floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab.
4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab slot to trigger
the release tab of the liftgate.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate reaches self
closing position.
Emergency Opening Tab Location
1 — Yellow Tab
Emergency Release Tab Slot Location
1 — Release Tab Slot
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside handle
release will lock the vehicle.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-
tronic liftgate release.
Cargo Area Features
Removable Rear Shelf — If Equipped
To remove rear shelf, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two links that support the shelf at the
eyelets.
Closing Liftgate
1 — Liftgate Pull Handle
Rear Shelf Support Links
1 — Links
2 — Eyelets
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage shelf.
3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf, and then
remove the rear shelf pulling it upwards.
4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area, or behind
the front seatbacks.
Cargo Load Floor
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can be
adjusted as needed.
Position 1 (Lowered Position):
This position allows you to make the load floor flat for ease
of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area. This
position also makes it possible to use the space below as
another compartment for storing fragile or smaller objects.
Adjusting The Rear Shelf
Rear Shelf Pin
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat is folded
flat, it will allow for loading objects of long dimensions. It
is recommended to use this position only during the actual
transporting of the objects, then bring the load floor in
position 1.
Table Tilt Load
In addition to the two positions described above, the load
floor can also be placed in a tilted position, slanted toward
the rear seatbacks as to ease the access to the underlying
zone of the luggage compartment (e.g. to pick up the spare
tire or the Tire Service Kit).
Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the supports 1
and 2 on the sides of the cargo area.
The load floor provides securing of any cargo inside this
position, so that the cargo will slide in the case of sudden
braking.
Load Floor
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.
2. Place the desired objects inside the compartment.
3. Reposition the load floor.
Table Tilt Load Supports
1 — Loading Floor Support One
2 — Loading Floor Support Two
Load Floor Handle
1 — Cargo Load Floor
2 — Cargo Load Floor Handle
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central position
with respect to cargo area.
Displacement Load Floor
To position the load from the lower to the upper position,
proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the load floor.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel guides
and on the rear cross member.
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and container
carrier, proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove the floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchoring Of The Load
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Cargo Area Storage
Tie-Downs
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
The side panels may be equipped with three grocery hooks
(one on the left side and two on the right side) for securing
loads that are not excessively heavy.
Cargo Box — If Equipped
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box that can be
used for the storage of objects that allows you to obtain a
uniform level when loading.
Grocery Hook
Grocery Hooks
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity of
distributed weight equal to 242 lbs (110 kg).
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger’s side
of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment proceed as follows:
1. Unlock the compartment using the vehicle emergency
key.
2. Pull the handle to open the compartment.
Once the glove compartment is open, a light will turn on to
illuminate the compartment.
Cargo Box
Opening The Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Handle
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
NOTE:
• Do not insert objects in the glove compartment that will
not allow the compartment to fully close.
• The glove compartment should be completely closed
while the vehicle is in motion.
Sun Visors
Sun visors are located on both sides of the rearview mirror.
The visors can be lowered or moved to the side to help
block sunlight from entering the windshield or door glass.
To move the sun visor against the driver or passenger door
glass, remove the sun visor from the hook and turn it
toward the side window.
The visors also have illuminated vanity mirrors to allow
use in low light conditions.
Lift upward on the mirror cover to access the mirror.
Sun Visor Mirror
1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Extendible Sun Visor
To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows:
1. Place the sun visor against the door glass by detaching
it from the hook and turning it toward the side window.
2. Slide the visor along the rod to provide coverage more
to the rear.
3. Slide out the sun visor extender for even more side
coverage toward the rear.
Sliding Sun Visor
1 — Sun Visor
Using The Extender
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
Power Outlets
The front power outlet is located under the center stack of
the instrument panel. It only operates with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Models equipped with the optional ⬙smoker kit,⬙ will have
a cigar lighter instead of the power outlet. Refer to “Cigar
Lighter⬙ in “Internal Equipment” for further information.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15
Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
12 Volt Power Outlet
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located
on the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC current. The Power Inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off
when the device is plugged in or removed.
115 Volt Power Inverter
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
In order for the Power Inverter to work, the engine must be
running and there must be no faults detected with the
alternator.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the Power Inverter
it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using
the Power Inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
The cigar lighter is located under the center stack of the
Instrument Panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to its
initial position and is ready to be used.
Cigar Lighter
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To
avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care.
Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15
Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
Ashtray — If Equipped
NOTE: Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar parts.
The ashtray is a plastic container that can be placed into
one of the cup holders.
Ashtray Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Front Armrest
The front armrest is located between the front seats.
The armrest can be adjusted by moving it forward or
rearward.
Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest to access
the storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a colli-
sion.
Front Armrest
Storage Compartment
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
There are two cupholders located in the rear armrest if
equipped.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
Handle Grip
The handle grip is located on the passenger side of the
instrument panel. The handle can be used to enter or exit
the vehicle or when traveling on rough terrain.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof Luggage Rack
for transporting accessories.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed
on the Roof Luggage Rack. Check the straps frequently to
be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a authorized dealer
through Mopar parts. External racks do not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the
load on the Roof Luggage Rack, do not exceed the maxi-
mum vehicle load capacity.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Handle Grip
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do not use the retractable roof when using the crossbars.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve-
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
should be secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER...................118
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions.............119
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ...........120
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls .............................121
▫ Oil Change Reset ......................122
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ......123
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER ........................128
䡵 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES ............................129
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................130
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................134
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights...................138
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................140
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................141
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................141
▫ Gray Indicator Lights ....................142
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . . .142
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .........................142
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................143
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Temperature Gauge
•
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
• The gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
Premium Instrument Cluster
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the
following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Settings
Setting the system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Location
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
The OK button may be used to confirm selection or held to
reset specific screens.
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will display
in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON or RUN
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. See an authorized dealer to have the oil life reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer is displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to toggle units (mph
or km/h) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
⬙Vehicle Info⬙ is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button and
Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the right or left
arrow button to scroll through the following information
displays:
• Tire Pressure — View the information relating to the
TPMS system (If Equipped).
• Coolant Temperature — View the engine coolant tem-
perature.
• Trans Temperature — View the trans oil temperature.
• Oil Temperature — View the oil temperature.
• Battery Voltage — View the voltage value (state of
charge) of the battery.
• Service — If Equipped — View the service status mes-
sage(s).
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Driver Assist menu title is displayed is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current Lane-
Sense system settings. The information displayed depends
on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to
be met.
Fuel Economy
This menu item allows you to view the fuel economy of the
vehicle. The following will display:
• Range (Miles or km)
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
• Current Consumption (mpg or L/100km or km/l)
• Average Consumption (mpg or L/100km or km/l)
Reset procedure shown at the bottom of the display.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the follow-
ing:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip
B since the last reset.
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
This menu shows messages related to Stop/Start. Only one
message can be viewed at a time until the condition is
cleared. When the Start/Stop is engaged (and the engine is
off), the associated hardware telltale is turned on. When-
ever a user pushes the Stop/Start button on the central
stack, a pop up message of the Stop/Start status will
appear on the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button
will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
This menu item allows you to change the position of the
information on the display.
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Gears (Vehicles With Reconfigurable Multi-
Functional Display And Automatic Transmission)
By selecting this item, you can select the display mode, the
particulars relating to the automatic transmission, and
choose between the following options:
• ⴖSingle digitⴖ
The right side of the display will show the letter concerning
the automatic transmission gear selector (P,R,N or D)
position. After approximately two seconds, the letter will
be displayed in a central position.
• ⴖFull PRNDⴖ
(Default): The letters PRND will display on the right side,
the position assumed by the gear selector will be high-
lighted in the display. During the operation in sequential
mode (⬙AutoStick⬙), in place of the letter D, the gear will be
will be displayed.
In The Upper-Left/Top Right
The information relating to the following can be displayed:
• External temperature
• Ignition Button — If Equipped
• Compass — If Equipped
• Date (Month/Day)
• Time (Hours/Minutes)
In the central area of the display, you can view all of the
information listed above as well as the following:
• Compass — If Equipped
• Speed Display — If Equipped
• Date (Day/Month/Year)
• Time
• Compass — If Equipped
• Ignition Button — If Equipped
• External Temp — If equipped
• Menu Item
• Distance Traveled A (Trip A)
• Distance Traveled B (Trip B)
Restore Default Settings
Selecting this item, and you can reset and restore the
default settings.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Settings
This menu item allows you to change the settings for the
following:
• Display
• Units
• Clock and Date
• Security
• Safety and Assistance
• Lights
• Doors and Locks
NOTE: Some items may be displayed and managed
through the Uconnect system.
Vehicles Equipped With Multifunctional Display Re-
configurable:
The following menu/submenu items are
available in the cluster display.
“Vehicle Shut Off (If Equipped)”
By selecting the item “Vehicle Shut Off”, you can turn off
the engine from the instrument cluster. This feature is
available in the event of an ignition switch failure, and will
display instructions for turning off the engine via the
instrument cluster display controls.
“Display”
By selecting the ⬙Display,⬙ you can access the following
setting:
• Language: allows you to select the language in which to
display the information/warnings.
ⴖUnits Of Measureⴖ
By selecting the item ⬙Units of Measure,⬙ you can select the
unit of measure to use for displaying various magnitudes.
Possible options are:
• US
• Metric
• Custom
ⴖClock & Dateⴖ
By selecting the item, ⬙Clock & Date⬙ you can adjust the
clock.
Possible options are:
• Set Time: adjust hours/minutes
• Set Format: adjust the time format ⬙12h⬙ (12 hours) or
⬙ 24h⬙ (24 hours)
• Set Date: adjust day/month/year
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Security”
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the follow-
ing adjustments:
• Speed Warning:
Set the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is notified
through a visual and acoustic signaling (display of a
message and a symbol on the display).
When the speed warning is set, the icon should remain
visualized for the same duration time of the pop up. If the
driver exceeded the set speed, the icon should remain for
however long the vehicle is over the set speed.
Driver may also turn the Speed Warning “OFF” should you
choose not to use this feature.
• Seat Belt Reminder:
This function is only viewable when the Seat Belt Re-
minder (SBR) system is active.
• Hill Start Assist:
Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist system.
• Passenger Air Bag — If Equipped
Front passenger air bag may be enabled or disabled.
ⴖLightsⴖ
By selecting the item ⬙Lights,⬙ you can make the following
adjustments:
• Headlight Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff
after engine shutoff
• Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of headlight
brightness
• Daytime Running Lights: activate/deactivate the day-
time running lights
• Cornering lights: activate/deactivate the cornering
lights (If Equipped)
• Interior Ambient lights: adjust the level of interior
ambient lights
• Greeting Lights: activate / deactivate greeting lights
ⴖDoors & Locksⴖ
By selecting the item ⬙Doors & Locks,⬙ you can make the
following adjustments:
• Auto Door Lock: activate/deactivate the automatic lock-
ing of the doors with the vehicle moving
• Auto Unlock On Exit: automatic unlocking of the doors
when exiting the vehicle
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
• Flash Light with Lock: activate the direction indicators
when closing the doors
• Sound Horn With Lock: activate/deactivate the horn
when pushing the LOCK button on the key fob. The
options are ⬙Off,⬙⬙First Press,” and ⬙Second Press⬙
• Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate the horn at
the Remote Starting of the engine with the key fob
• Remote Door Unlock: allows you to open the driver
door only on the first push of the UNLOCK button on
the key fob
• Passive Entry (If Equipped) : activate the automatic
locking of the doors
“Compass”
By selecting the item “Compass” you can make the follow-
ing adjustments:
• Compass Calibration
• Compass Variance
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip computer is used to display information on car
operation when the key is turned to the RUN position.
This function allows you to define two separate trips called
“Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car’s ⬙complete trips⬙ are
monitored in an independent manner.
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new trip). To
perform a reset, push and hold the OK button on the
steering wheel controls.
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the figures
relating to:
• Distance Travelled
• Average Consumption
• Travel Time (driving time)
Quantities Displayed
Distance Travelled
• Indicates the distance travelled by the start of the new
trip.
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Average Consumption
• Represents the average fuel consumption since the start
of the new trip.
Travel Time
• Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
OK Button
Short Push Of The Button: display of various parameters.
Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and begin a new
trip.
New trip
Starts after reset:
• ⬙Manual⬙ by pushing the OK button.
• ⬙Automatic⬙ when the ⬙distance⬙ reaches the value of
62140 (99999.9 km) or when the ⬙time travel⬙ reaches the
value of 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes).
• After each disconnection and reconnection of the battery.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you
to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make
sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your
vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
— Brake Warning Light (English) — Brake
Warning Light (Metric)
This light monitors various brake functions, including
brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the
brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by your authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and
not fully closed.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected
while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with the
vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this light will illuminate and a single chime will
sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left
open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is left open
and not fully closed.
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light will illuminate if there is a failure of the oil
pressure sensor. If this light illuminates, take it to an
authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil
temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Transmission Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the
instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the
message remains after restarting the engine.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Yellow Warning Lights
— Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal when there is a
fault detected with the Active Speed Limiter.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Audio System Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate to report a failure of the Audio
System. Contact an authorized dealership as soon as pos-
sible.
— Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electronic
Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward
Collision Warning is off.
— Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L)
this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
— LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and
steering torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn
signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the LaneSense indicator changes from solid green to
solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to
flashing yellow.
• Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense
system is not operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the
4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you
drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
— Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the
Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Refer to ⬙Forward Collision Warning (FCW)⬙ in ⬙Safety⬙ for
further information.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
system is not functioning properly and service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer for service.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
— Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure with the tow
hook. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is
running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run
the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear drive-
shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased
torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on four-
wheel drive operation and proper use.
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— 4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the
four-wheel drive LOCK mode. The front and rear drive-
shafts are mechanically locked together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive
operation and proper use.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Sta-
bility Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in
one of the exterior bulbs.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
— Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an accident has
occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.
— Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff failure. If
this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and
have them inspect it.
— Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm
system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle.
NOTE: After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if
a problem with the system is detected. This condition will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the
4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. We recommend you
drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
White Indicator Lights
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent Control (HDC)
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is
in the “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met
while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indi-
cator light will flash on/off.
— Light Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is light sensor failure. If
this light illuminates, have an authorized dealer inspect it.
— Speed Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning
telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a
number matching the set speed. When the set speed is
exceeded, a single chime will sound along with pop up
message of “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed Warning can
be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display, for
further information refer to “Instrument Cluster Display
Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel.”
The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be set.
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
Green Indicator Lights
— Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high beam head-
lights are on.
— Speed Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the speed control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Hazard Warning Lights
The hazard warning indicators light up when the vehicles
Hazard Warning flasher switch has been pushed.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start
function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Gray Indicator Lights
— Electronic Speed Control Ready/Canceled
Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control
function is ready (but not set), or cancelled, by the driver.
Refer to ⬙Speed Control — If Equipped⬙ in ⬙Starting and
Operating⬙ for further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic trans-
mission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Mul-
timedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................146
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............146
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............147
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ............158
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .158
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation — If Equipped .................166
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........173
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........181
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems ...............181
▫ Important Safety Precautions...............181
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................182
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........192
▫ Child Restraints .......................208
▫ Transporting Pets ......................224
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................224
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................224
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................225
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...........................226
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................228
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
146 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Anti-
Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitiga-
tion (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), and Hill
Descent Control (HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
SAFETY 147
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate
the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If the
driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA
will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period.
If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time
expires, the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle
applied.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is
in PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other ve-
hicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
(Continued)
148 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Disabling and Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster dis-
play, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine
power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active
automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recog-
nized.
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Tow-
ing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
5
SAFETY 149
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
(Continued)
150 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operation Modes
To disable ESC and other safety systems, follow the instruc-
tion below.
There are three modes of active safety systems present on
the vehicle:
• ESC On
• Partial Off
• Full Off
ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when operating
a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal mode for
operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD
HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On” mode
whenever the vehicle is started or the power transfer unit
(if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW range. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for specific
reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” and to “Full Off” for
additional information.
NOTE: It is recommended to select the mode ⬙Partial Off⬙
or ⬙Full Off⬙ only for specific reasons.
5
SAFETY 151
Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin
than what ESC normally allows.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” button and the ESC Off indicator light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light will
turn off. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand,
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. Once
the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off”
button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC OFF Button
152 SAFETY
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High And
4WD Low Range
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and
off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit
vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. The “ESC
Off” button is located in the lower switch bank above the
climate control panel. To enter “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the “ESC Off” button for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate and an
“ESC Off” message will appear in the odometer.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At speeds
over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically switches
to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When the vehicle
speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC
system will return to “Full Off” mode. The ESC OFF
indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is off. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”
button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist
in maintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is only intended
for off-highway or off-road use.
NOTE:
• “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or
the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW range.
• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will
sound when the gear selector is moved from any posi-
tion to the PARK position and then moved out of the
PARK position. This will occur even if the message was
cleared previously.
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the activation of
some driving modes provide partial off or full off of some
active safety systems in order to optimize performance in
specific modes.
Partial or full off of the active safety systems will be
indicated by a light in the instrument cluster.
5
SAFETY 153
In ⬙SAND⬙ and ⬙MUD⬙, the active safety systems are
partially disabled and put in place to ensure maximum
performance in the specific mode of operation. However,
you can reactivate them completely at any time by pushing
the ESC button.
NOTE: In 4WD LOW, the active safety systems are com-
pletely bypassed in order to ensure maximum off-road
performance.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine run-
ning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a mal-
function has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles/kilometers at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when Traction Control System is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off
or full off.
The ESC OFF switch is located in the center console.
154 SAFETY
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu-
vers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occur-
ring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in this
section for a complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions,
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Miti-
gation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway or
striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure
is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS
5
SAFETY 155
and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode or the “Full Off”
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system
with the electric power steering to increase the safety level
of the whole car. In critical situations (understeering,
oversteering, braking with different grip conditions),
through the DST function the ESC system controls the
steering to implement an additional torque contribution on
the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver to
the driver. The coordinated action of brakes and steering
increases the safety and car control feeling.
NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the car.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
156 SAFETY
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling ve-
hicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
• Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
• Driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than
approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by
the driver and can be adjusted using brake and throttle
input.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but remains
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude
(less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• Driver’s door opens.
5
SAFETY 157
• The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately.)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about
the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is
the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then
extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch
when enable conditions have not been met.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-Terrain
knob in the upper right position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is re-
sponsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
158 SAFETY
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approxi-
mately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches ap-
proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detec-
tion zones.
• If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is necessary to
deactivate BSM system manually by settings menu to
avoid a misdetection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function prop-
erly. Do not block the radar sensors located on the rear
fascia with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
Rear Sensor Locations
5
SAFETY 159
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
BSM Warning Light
Side Monitoring
160 SAFETY
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (25 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
5
SAFETY 161
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
Overtaking/Passing Stationary Objects
162 SAFETY
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
RCP Detection Zones
5
SAFETY 163
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 mph
(2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, includ-
ing reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted.
164 SAFETY
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be a related
message on instrument cluster display. If BSM system is
off, this message will be visualized every time the vehicle
is restarted.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Sensor Blinded
In the case of a sensor blinded:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message will display.
NOTE: The rear bumper must be clean and free of any
obstructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporary unavailable:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message will display.
In the case of the system being completely unavailable:
• A chime will sound.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message will display.
NOTE: Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized
dealer for service.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2.
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
5
SAFETY 165
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System with Miti-
gation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited brak-
ing are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
• FCW monitors the information from the forward look-
ing sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
• If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the end of
the intervention of automatic braking, the engine could
stall, unless the driver can depress the clutch pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the end of
the intervention of automatic braking, the transmission
may remain in last gear stored: therefore the vehicle could
lurch forward, once the brakes release a few seconds later.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
166 SAFETY
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warn-
ing with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
• If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, the FCW system
will be automatically deactivated.
• The active braking is disabled when a trailer is con-
nected with a Mopar Trailer Towing system. If the
vehicle is equipped with an aftermarket system, it is
recommended that the Active Braking is turned off
manually.
FCW Message
5
SAFETY 167
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the respon-
sibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warn-
ing could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “Warning + Active
Braking,” this allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you and enable the
active braking.
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the sys-
tem, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible collision
• Changing the FCW status to “Only warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the status of the system is only possible with the
vehicle at a complete stop.
NOTE: The FCW system state is not kept in memory from
one ignition position to the next. If the system is turned off,
it will turn on when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity
By changing the settings on the menu of the Uconnect
system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by
choosing one of the following three options: ⬙Near⬙, ⬙Me-
dium⬙ or ⬙Far⬙. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
The default option is ⬙Medium⬙. This setting provides that
the system notify the driver of a possible accident with the
vehicle ahead of it when the latter is at a standard distance,
intermediate between the other two possible settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to ⬙Far⬙, the system
will warn the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle
in front when the latter is at a greater distance, giving you
the chance to act on the brakes in a more limited and
gradual. This setting gives the driver the maximum pos-
sible time of reaction to prevent a possible accident.
168 SAFETY
By changing the option to ⬙Near⬙, the system will warn the
driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it
when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting offers a
reaction time to the driver lower than the settings ⬙Me-
dium⬙ and ⬙Far⬙, in the case of a potential accident, while a
more dynamic driving of the vehicle.
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is maintained in
memory when the engine is switched off.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
• FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
“FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” Warn-
ing
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The system
may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will read “FCW Front Radar Sensor Tem-
porarily Blocked” and the system will deactivate.
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” mes-
sage can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
5
SAFETY 169
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. In absence of visible obstructions on the
bumper, it could be necessary to wipe off the radar directly
on the surface, after having the radar cover removed. It’s
recommended that your authorized dealer perform this
operation.
NOTE:
• If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized
dealer.
• Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and
inhibit FCW operation.
• Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use solvents or
abrasive pastes.
• The radar is equipped with a defrost system, so in some
climatic conditions it could reach high temperatures.
Wait at least 30 seconds after the engine has been cycled
OFF before touching the sensor.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
In certain driving conditions, such as:
• Driving in the vicinity of a curve
• Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
• Lane changing of other vehicles
• Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
The intervention of the system could be unexpected or
delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular
attention, while maintaining control of the vehicle to drive
in complete safety.
170 SAFETY
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could detect
the presence of a vehicle that is in front of the vehicle, but
that does not preside in the same lane. In cases such as this,
the system might respond.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of vehicles
that are in front of the vehicle but placed outside the field
of action of the radar sensor and could therefore not react
in the presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
motorcycles.
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
5
SAFETY 171
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while standing in the
traffic lane of their vehicle and inside the field of action of
the radar sensor may cause the intervention of the system.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that
crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an oncoming
intersection.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
172 SAFETY
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi-
mately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
5
SAFETY 173
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance. Customers are
encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure TPMS
feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-
come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
174 SAFETY
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect TPMS informa-
tion on your instrument cluster.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument cluster,
an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on
your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically up-
date and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off.
5
SAFETY 175
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault
condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to
any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
•
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare
tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and
the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next
ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
176 SAFETY
5.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update auto-
matically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitor System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
5
SAFETY 177
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically up-
date, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
178 SAFETY
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be moni-
tored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a
chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a Tire Low message, an
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing the low
tire pressure value in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires.
4. The instrument cluster will display a graphic showing
the tire pressure value in the same color as the other
pressure values in place of the different color low tire
pressure value. The instrument cluster will also display
a dedicated message to remind you to service the flat
tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1.
The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different color
pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5
SAFETY 179
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automati-
cally. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing Winter wheel and tire assemblies on your ve-
hicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped
with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and the
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM
telltale and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
in the instrument cluster display but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPM
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off, and the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message. The instrument cluster will also
display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
180 SAFETY
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) must be secured in the appro-
priate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a
rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
5
SAFETY 181
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to “Customer
Assistance” for customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Front And Rear Seat BeltAlert (If Equipped)
Front Seat BeltAlert
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger to buckle their seat
belts. The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
182 SAFETY
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position a chime will signal for a few
seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or
ON/RUN position the respective Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn solid red and remain red until the seat belt is
buckled. The respective Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
solid green once the seat belt is buckled. After the driver and
outboard front seat passenger have buckled their seat belts
all Seat Belt Reminder Lights will turn off. The outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the out-
board front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the ve-
hicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (the
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when
the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the respective
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain solid red until the
driver and outboard front seat passenger are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct
all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
Rear Seat BeltAlert
Rear Seat BeltAlert shows the driver whether the seat belts
in the rear seat are buckled or unbuckled. When the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position, a
Seat Belt Reminder Light turns on for each rear seat
position. If a seat belt is buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder
5
SAFETY 183
Light for that position will illuminate solid green for a few
seconds, and then turn off. If a seat belt is unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate red for a few
seconds, and then turn off. If the vehicle is moving above
a specified vehicle speed range and a rear passenger
unbuckles a seat belt that was buckled at the start of the
trip, an intermittent chime will sound, and the Seat Belt
Reminder Light for that position will change from solid
green to blinking red. This will alert the driver to stop the
vehicle until the rear passenger buckles the seat belt again.
When the rear passenger buckles the seat belt, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will change to solid green for a few
seconds, before turning off.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
(Continued)
184 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 185
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
186 SAFETY
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
5
SAFETY 187
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
188 SAFETY
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 189
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
190 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.”
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
5
SAFETY 191
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
192 SAFETY
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP/
OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc-
tion in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
5
SAFETY 193
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which
could affect the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to
alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has
come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” section of this manual.
194 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a
supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIR-
BAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
5
SAFETY 195
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
196 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
5
SAFETY 197
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
198 SAFETY
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk
of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
5
SAFETY 199
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
200 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
5
SAFETY 201
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
202 SAFETY
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
5
SAFETY 203
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the igni-
tion switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn
signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be
blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system
reset procedure.
204 SAFETY
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step
MUST BE held for at
least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/
LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch
Must be placed in Neutral
State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neu-
tral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step
MUST BE held for at
least two seconds
6. Place turn signal in neu-
tral state.
Right turn light
BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neu-
tral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal
switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
5
SAFETY 205
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step
MUST BE held for at
least two seconds
11. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire se-
quence needs to be com-
pleted within one minute or
sequence will need to be re-
peated).
System is now reset
and the engine may be
started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF
(Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset
procedure must be performed again in order to be success-
ful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
206 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not
function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used.
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
5
SAFETY 207
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call
1-888-327-4236.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm.
208 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat
of the vehicle
5
SAFETY 209
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child re-
straint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint
in that vehicle.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in
the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who are over two years old or who have outgrown the
rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convert-
ible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing
child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion
while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use
a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
210 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
5
SAFETY 211
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
212 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 213
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the LATCH anchor-
age system to attach the child re-
straint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system
until the combined weight of the
child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seat-
ing position.
214 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH an-
chorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
with two or more child restraints. If
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of
the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be re-
moved?
No
5
SAFETY 215
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
A — Lower Anchorage Location
216 SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH :
WARNING!
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not ap-
proved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Tether Anchorage Locations
5
SAFETY 217
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1.
Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3.
Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint
to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
218 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
5
SAFETY 219
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
220 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint..
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be re-
moved?
No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retrac-
tor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
5
SAFETY 221
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
222 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
5
SAFETY 223
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
224 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
5
SAFETY 225
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
226 SAFETY
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 227
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
228 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ..................233
▫ Tip Start Feature .......................233
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................234
▫ Cold Weather Operation .................235
▫ Extended Park Starting ...................235
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .....235
▫ Stopping The Engine ....................236
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped . . . .236
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .236
䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) .............237
▫ Auto Park Brake .......................240
▫ SafeHold ............................240
▫ Brake Service Mode .....................241
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ................242
▫ Shifting ..............................243
▫ Downshifting..........................244
䡵 NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .246
▫ Gear Selector ..........................247
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................248
▫ Transmission Limp Home Mode ............253
▫ Ignition Park Interlock ...................254
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System .....254
䡵 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE.....................255
▫ Four Wheel Drive (4x4)...................255
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN ........................257
▫ Mode Selection Guide....................257
䡵 ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTER —
IF EQUIPPED . . . .259
䡵 POWER STEERING.......................259
6
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM ....................260
▫ Automatic Mode .......................260
▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .............................260
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . . .261
▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .262
▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . . .263
▫ System Malfunction .....................263
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..........263
▫ Activation ............................264
▫ Setting A Desired Speed ..................264
▫ Varying The Speed ......................264
▫ Accelerating For Passing ..................265
▫ Resume Speed .........................265
▫ Deactivation ..........................266
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED ............................266
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation .....268
▫ To Activate/Deactivate ...................268
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .....269
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed ...............270
▫ To Cancel ............................270
▫ ToTurnOff...........................270
▫ To Resume ...........................271
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................271
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC .......273
▫ Overtake Aid ..........................275
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........276
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance .........276
▫ Precautions While Driving
With ACC.........279
▫ General Information .....................282
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .283
䡵 REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..........286
▫ Rear ParkSense Sensors ..................286
▫ Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense .......288
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Operation With A Trailer..................288
▫ Service The Rear ParkSense System ..........289
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........289
䡵 FRONT AND REAR PARKSENSE —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................290
▫ ParkSense Sensors ......................291
▫ ParkSense Warning Display................292
▫ ParkSense Display ......................292
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........301
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System .....302
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System.............302
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions .........302
▫ Side Distance Warning System..............304
䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................307
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System..........................308
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display ......................309
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display ......................318
▫ Exiting The Parking Space.................327
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............335
▫ LaneSense Operation ....................335
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off ..............336
▫ LaneSense Warning Message ...............336
▫ Changing LaneSense Status ................341
䡵 REAR BACK UP CAMERA .................341
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................343
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................346
▫ Certification Label ......................346
䡵 TRAILER
TOWING ......................348
▫ Common Towing Definitions...............348
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ................351
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) .............................352
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ...............353
▫ Towing Requirements ...................353
▫ Towing Tips...........................357
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING .................358
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .358
▫ Recreational Towing .....................359
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................360
▫ On-Road Driving Tips ...................360
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips ...................360
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the accelera-
tor.
3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it as
soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the OFF
mode and wait 10-15 seconds before attempting to
restart the engine.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
briefly to the START mode and release it. The starter motor
will continue to run but will automatically disengage when
the engine is running.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure,
and has not experienced an extended park condition as
identified in ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedure it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in RUN mode, release
the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cold Weather Operation
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions
an externally powered electric block heater (if equipped) is
required for the 1.3L Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and
for the 2.4L engine below -31°F (-35°C) and is recom-
mended for the 2.4L engine below -20°F (-29°C).
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than -20°F (-29°C) for
the 1.3L Turbo engine, and -31°F (-35°C) for the 2.4L engine,
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine
block heater has not been used. The message “plug in
engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster
when the ambient temperature is below -4°F (-20°C) at the
time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible
crank delays at the next cold start.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle
the ignition to the OFF mode, wait five seconds to allow
the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu-
ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
Proceed as follows:
• Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced RPM,
without accelerating suddenly.
• It is recommended to wait until the engine coolant
temperature gauge starts to rise for maximum perfor-
mance.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Stopping The Engine
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
push the START/STOP button three times consecutively
within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the
ignition will be placed in the RUN position.
Turning OFF the car (cycle the ignition from the RUN
mode to the OFF mode), the power supply to the accesso-
ries are maintained for a period of three minutes.
NOTE: If the vehicle fails to shut off using the ignition,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN will
sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place the
ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the window
switches remains active for three minutes. Opening a front
door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the tempera-
ture inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting
off the engine.
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the
turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the
type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run
for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to
circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the
pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal
to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
You can engage the EPB in two ways;
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect settings or in “Safe Hold” conditions.
Electric Park Brake Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch momen-
tarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back
of the vehicle while the EPB engages. Once the parking
brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the EPB, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement. The EPB can be applied even when the
ignition is in the OFF mode however, it can only be
released when the ignition is in the RUN mode.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon
releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB will
automatically engage whenever the transmission is moved
into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when the
ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF position. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the EPB is engaging.
The electric park brake will be automatically released if the
driver’s seat belt is buckled (only in case of automatic
transmission) and driver’s intention to start (in forward or
reverse direction) is recognized by the system
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must be in the
RUN mode. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push
the EPB switch down momentarily. You may hear a slight
whirring sound from the back of the car while the parking
brake disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
movement in the brake pedal. Once the EPB is fully
disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
• When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the EPB before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The EPB
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
• If the clutch pedal is released at the same time the gas
pedal is pressed, the EPB will be automatically released
(manual transmissions only).
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, maintain
upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as engage-
ment is desired. The brake warning lamp could illuminate
in case of the hydraulic system is not available. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the
vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, release
the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop
using the EPB, when the vehicle reaches approximately
1.9 mph (3 km/h) the EPB will remain engaged.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be sure
the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving;
failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a
yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be accom-
panied by the Brake warning lamp flashing. In this status
some EPB functionalities may be deactivated. In this event,
urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do not rely on
the EPB to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition is in the OFF
mode. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by cus-
tomer selection through the Customer Programmable Fea-
tures section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmission)
and the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some cases, with
an automatic transmission, if at the cycle of key from RUN
to the OFF mode the gear selector is not firmly locked in
Parking position, EPB applies automatically even if Auto
Park Brake has been previously disabled.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured while the ignition is in the RUN mode.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB
Switch while the driver door is open and the brake pedal is
pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be en-
abled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or
the ignition is cycled to the OFF mode and back to RUN
again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You
should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake ser-
vice.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator
retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake Service
Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This
menu based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform
rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The parking brake must be disabled.
• The transmission must be in park or neutral.
• The EPB switch not activated.
• The vehicle in ignition RUN mode.
• The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
continuously while the ignition is in the RUN mode.
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to the floor and
put the gear selector to the desired position (the diagram
for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle
of the lever).
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift
the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and simultane-
ously move the lever to the left and then forward.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed
in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or
pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may
not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
All Engines Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
REVERSE Ring
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle
is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch
pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The
noise may also be more noticeable when the transmission is
warm. This noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recom-
mended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills.
In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better
acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the
engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to
the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch dam-
age, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer
case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause
engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or
damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at
too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause
the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected
and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch
and the transmission can result from skipping a gear
while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a
vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed
(i.e., not released).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient nine-speed transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed beside
the gear selector and in the instrument cluster display. To
select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem⬙ in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Gear Selector
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer
to “AutoStick” in this section for further information).
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) will
manually select the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of FCA current and future lineup of FWD/AWD
vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By de-
sign, some vehicle and drive-line combinations utilize 9th
gear only in very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the Electric Park Brake (EPB) by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the EPB when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the EPB.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting the
transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmis-
sion locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Gear Selector Lock Button
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
park brake. Always apply the park brake fully when
exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the ve-
hicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify
that the transmission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK posi-
tion is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally (or stopped) and your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running or the propulsion system is active. Before
exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the park brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition
is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted move-
ment.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
gear selector, and firmly move the gear selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
• With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the electric park brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmis-
sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the trans-
mission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex-
pand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmis-
sion Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission tempera-
ture as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maxi-
mum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and rear-
ward. This allows the driver to manually select the trans-
mission gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward
(-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The
current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the gear selector
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine overspeed.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first or
second gear (depending on model) when coming to a
stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first or second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snow or icy
conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to
select the desired gear after the vehicle is brought to a
stop.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is electronically monitored for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in neutral. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock,
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. Also, the trans-
mission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the RUN
mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be
pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing the
button on the gear selector to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or mov-
ing at low speeds.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive Low
(4WD Low)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer Unit
(PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If
the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal
driving mode.
NOTE: It is not possible to carry out the change of mode
when the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h).
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four wheel drive are
located on the device Selec-Terrain and allow you to select
the following:
• 4WD LOCK
• 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure imme-
diate availability of torque to the rear drive axles. This
feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in the
other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
• When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
• When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from AUTO to
any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk Models
Only)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road
performance in all modes. To enable 4WD Low, please
follow the steps below:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in RUN mode or
with the engine running, shift the transmission into NEU-
TRAL and push the button once 4WD LOW. The instru-
ment cluster will display the message ⬙4WD LOW⬙ once
the shift is complete.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and then become
active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the shift is
complete.
• The instrument cluster display will illuminate the ⬙4WD
Low⬙ icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be
stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL.
Push the 4WD LOW button once.
SELEC-TERRAIN
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle con-
trol systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
performance for all terrains.
Mode Selection Guide
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
• AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous
operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and off
road. This mode balances traction to ensure maneuver-
ability and acceleration improvement compared to a
vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode also reduces
fuel consumption, since it allows the disconnect of the
drive shaft where conditions permit.
• SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability
under conditions of bad weather. It’s used on and off
road and on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads
covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending
on certain operating conditions), the transmission will
use second gear (rather than first gear) during launches,
to minimize wheel slippage, except for in 4–Low (Trail-
hawk models only).
• SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor
traction, such as sandy bottoms. The transmission is set
to provide maximum traction. This mode allows more
wheel spin and higher shift points to help motor
through loose areas.
• MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor
traction, such as roads covered by mud or wet grass.
• ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available in
4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to maxi-
mize traction and allow the highest steering capacity for
off-road surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum
performance off-road. Use for low speed obstacles such
as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Trailhawk package.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control
for steep downhill control. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Safety” for further information.
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Active Grille Shutters,
an automatic system with mobile flaps applied in front of
the cooling module, whose automatic opening/closing
movement aims at improving the vehicle aerodynamic
efficiency and thus reducing consumption while ensuring
optimal engine operating temperature conditions.
When a greater air flow is required for cooling (e.g. when
driving in urban traffic) the flaps open, whereas when
temperature is low or air flow is enough (example when
driving on highways), the flaps close.
If there is a failure detected, the instrument panel will
illuminate the engine check/malfunction indicator warn-
ing light.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces
assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it
indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
STOP/START SYSTEM
The Stop/Start function was developed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine automati-
cally during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are
met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator
pedal will automatically restart the engine.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal cus-
tomer engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Au-
tostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start section.
Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine
will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable
cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode (if equipped with
4WD).
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure with
vehicle in DRIVE position.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Engine temp too high.
• 5 mph threshold not achieved from previous AU-
TOSTOP.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times
without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon en-
gine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-
matically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
except in the PARK and NEUTRAL position.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal appli-
cations).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode (if equipped with
4WD).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released.
• The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off, the
engine may require a manual restart and the electric park
brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal
and push Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display. Refer to “Warning Lights
And Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system), the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to the ON
mode every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
STOP/START OFF Switch
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off 4 — SET (-)/Decel
2 — SET (+)/Accel 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — RES/Resume
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
NOTE:
• In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control
System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated
by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and reset-
ting the desired vehicle set speed.
• The Speed Control function will not work in 4WD Low
Range.
Activation
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
Setting A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelera-
tor and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Varying The Speed
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is depen-
dant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. The speed increment shown is depen-
dant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Accelerating For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition to OFF
erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving con-
venience provided by cruise control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please refer to the
proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to
reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC
will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an ap-
propriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in
this section.
NOTE: Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react
to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the cruise control
buttons. The two control modes function differently. Al-
ways confirm which mode is selected.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse
sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
You should turn the ACC system off:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operate the ACC system.
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster
display will read “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Speed Control Buttons
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
6 — Distance Setting — Increase
7 — Distance Setting — Decrease
8 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following con-
ditions:
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• When you apply the brakes.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL.
• When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not,
the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “Adaptive Cruise Control Override” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed
will only be determined by the position of the accelera-
tor pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
• Manual transmission is not in a forward gear, if
equipped.
• Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch pressed
down for a fixed amount of time, if equipped.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the RES button
and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The
instrument cluster display will show the last set speed.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that
is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing the SET (-) button.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET
(-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
• If equipped with a manual transmission, it is possible to
make gear changes during the normal operation of ACC
that will allow the driver to engage the appropriate gear
with respect the set speed in order to keep the feature
activated. It is canceled when the clutch pedal is held
down, or when placing the gearbox in NEUTRAL for a
certain maximum time.
• If equipped with an automatic transmission, ACC sys-
tems could automatically downshift to a lower gear
when driving down hill or during accelerations. There-
fore, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
This is normal and necessary to maintain the set speed.
When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system
will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting will show in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
Once the longest setting is reached, if the button is pushed
again it will be set to the shortest setting available.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set
speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same
lane, the instrument cluster display will show the “Sensed
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, re-
gardless of the set speed.
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain
the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
appear in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action and does
not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning
system is applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the
ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
Brake Alert
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display shows the current ACC
system settings. The instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
shows in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will read in the instru-
ment cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” Warning
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” warn-
ing will display and also a chime will indicate when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” and
the system will deactivate.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” mes-
sage can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Blocked” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer to
“Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
bumper.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor
lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the
sensor lens.
• Do not use solvents or abrasive pastes. The radar is
equipped with a defrost system, so in some climatic
conditions it could reach high temperatures. Wait at least
30 seconds after the engine has been cycled to OFF
before touching the sensor.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
NOTE:
• If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized
dealer.
• Installing a snow plow or front-end protector is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and
inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front Wind-
shield” warning will display to indicate when conditions
temporarily limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy
rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporar-
ily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases,
the instrument cluster display will read “ACC/FCW Lim-
ited Functionality Wipe Front Windshield” and the system
will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front Wind-
shield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving
in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Frontal Camera
Service Required”, “Cruise Control Service Required”, or
“Cruise Control Temporarily Unavailable⬙, there may be an
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporar-
ily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly.
The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset
from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from
a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of
the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stabil-
ity reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the
vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your
original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
ACC Hill Example
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have
moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the
vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising
at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without
requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Speed
Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes, push the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns
the ACC on and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
off. Pushing of the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the
system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to main-
tain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is se-
lected.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on. When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle
will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/km/h)
will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will
turn on when the speed control is set.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown is depen-
dant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you
can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown is depen-
dant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 5 km/h decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected
in the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANC button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
• The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.
• Manual transmission is not in a forward gear, if
equipped.
• Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch pressed
down, if equipped.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory
if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear ParkSense system provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions”
for limitations of this system and recommendations.
Rear ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the RUN position.
Rear ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is
in REVERSE.
Rear ParkSense Sensors
The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 59
inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the hori-
zontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
Chime
By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in the case of the
presence of a rear obstacle, an acoustic signal that varies
with the distance of the obstacle from the bumper is
activated.
Parking Sensors
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
The frequency of the acoustic signal:
• Increases with the distance between vehicle and object
decreases.
• Becomes continuous when the distance that separates
the vehicle from the obstacle is less than approximately
12 inches (30 cm), while terminates immediately if the
distance to the obstacle increases.
• Remains constant if the distance between vehicle and
obstacle remains unchanged. If this situation occurs for
the external sensors, the signal is stopped after approxi-
mately three seconds to avoid, for example, it activates
in case of maneuver along a wall.
When the system emits a beeping sound, the volume of the
Uconnect system, if turned on, is automatically lowered by
Rear ParkSense.
Detection Distances
If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is taken into account
only what is the shorter distance.
Instrument Cluster Display
Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instrument cluster only
if you have selected ⬙Sound and Display⬙ within the ⬙Safety
And Driving Assistance⬙ menu of the Uconnect system.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
In general, the vehicle is closest to the obstacle when the
display shows only a flashing arc and the chime becomes
continuous.
The color on the display depends on the distance and
location of the obstacle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch.
When the Rear ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster dis-
play will show a message such as “PARKSENSE
DISABLED” for approximately five seconds. Re-
fer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Rear ParkSense switch LED turns ON when the system
is disabled by pressing the switch, as well as in case of
failure or temporary disabling conditions. The Rear
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is
enabled. If the Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Rear ParkSense will remember the previous state when the
vehicle is switch off.
CAUTION!
After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear ParkSense
remains in this setting until the next ignition cycle,
even in the case of changing the setting of starting
RUN to OFF and then again in RUN.
Operation With A Trailer
The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deacti-
vated when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle’s tow hook socket. In this situation, the ParkSense
Switch LED turns on.
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer’s cable plug is removed.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service The Rear ParkSense System
During vehicle start up, when the Rear ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
will display a message such as “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UN-
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
show a message such as ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ for approximately five seconds.
Under this condition, Rear ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tions and then cycle the ignition. if the message continues
to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an autho-
rized dealer.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstruction to keep the Rear ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear ParkSense.
• Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The Rear ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could pro-
vide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the trailer hitch and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
FRONT AND REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or
front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for limita-
tions of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense is active when the gear selector is shifted to
REVERSE or to a forward gear and an obstacle is detected,
as long as the system is ON. When the gear selector shifted
to NEUTRAL (or PARK in case of automatic gearbox), the
system becomes inactive. When the vehicle is moving
forward, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed remains below approximately 11 mph (18 km/h).
Reducing the speed approximately below 9 mph (15 km/
h), the system will come back active. When the vehicle is
moving in REVERSE, the system will remain active as long
as the speed remains below the maximum operating speed
of 7 mph (11 km/h). When the maximum speed limit is
exceeded, the system is disabled and the ParkSense switch
LED with illuminate. The system will become active again
if the vehicle speed reduces below approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 59 inches (150
cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-
tion, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
NOTE: For further information on Active Park Assist, refer
to the “ParkSense Active Park Assist System” section.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 39
inches (100 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instru-
ment cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indi-
cate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
Rear Park Assist
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument cluster
display will show the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the audible chime will increase as the objects
gets closer to the vehicle.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region As the vehicle moves closer to the
obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer
to the vehicle and the audible chime will increase as the
objects get closer to the vehicle.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
59 in (150
cm)
59–52 in
(150-130
cm)
52-41 in
(130-105
cm)
41-34 in
(105-85
cm)
34-24 in
(85-60 cm)
24-12 in
(60-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Cen-
ter
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single, 1/2
second,
audible
chime is
heard.
Audible chime increases as the objects gets closer to the
vehicle.
Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist
The ParkSense warning screen will be displayed when the
gear selector is in the DRIVE position and an obstacle is
detected, as long as the vehicle speed is below approxi-
mately 11 mph (18 km/h).
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. As
the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
audible chime will increase as the object gets close to the
vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right front region . As the vehicle moves closer to
the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and the audible chime will increase as
the objects gets close to the vehicle.
No Tone/Solid Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
39 in (100 cm)
39-32 in
(100-80 cm)
32-24 in
(80-60 cm)
24-12 in
(60-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None None None Audible chime
increases as the
objects gets close
to the vehicle.
Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-
stacle has been detected, and the vehicle is stationary. If the
obstacle has been detected within less than 12 inches (30
cm), then the Parksense will not turn off the Front Park
Assist audible alert.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from
the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume settings
will not be accessible from the instrument cluster display.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster display will
show the “ParkSense Disabled” message for ap-
proximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense switch LED turns on when the system is
disabled by pushing the switch, as well as in case of failure
or temporary disabling conditions. The ParkSense switch
LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
When the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condi-
tion, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single
chime, and it will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙,orthe⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure
the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an autho-
rized dealer.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster dis-
play, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and
a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch
or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, etc. are placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper.
Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting
a close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be displayed in the instrument cluster dis-
play.
NOTE: If any objects are attached to the bumper within a
6.5ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and cause false
alerts and possibly blockage.
• There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving.
• The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deac-
tivated when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle’s tow hook socket, while the front sensors stay
active and can provide acoustic and visual warnings.
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer’s cable plug is removed.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
Side Distance Warning System
The Side Distance Warning system has the function of
detecting the presence of side obstacles near the vehicle
using the parking sensors located in the front and rear
bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal and
where provided, with visual indications on the instrument
panel display.
Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance
(in/cm)
Less than 12
inches (30 cm)
12–65 inches
(30–60 cm)
Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing
Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Continuous Audible chime in-
creases as the objects
within the vehicle’s
path get close to the
vehicle.
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
NOTE: Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
when the system is sounding an audible tone.
Activation — Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short distance
and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 11 mph (0 and
18 km/h). The system can be activated/deactivated via the
⬙Settings⬙ menu of the Uconnect system. If the ParkSense
System is deactivated via the ParkSense Hard switch then
the side distance warning system will automatically be
deactivated.
Message on the display for Side Distance Warning fea-
ture:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the case of
a failure of the Side Distance Warning system sensors. Free
the bumpers of any obstacles, ensure that the front and rear
bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
“SDW Not Available” — This message is displayed if the
Side Distance Warning system is not available. The failed
operation of the system might be due to the insufficient
voltage from the battery or other failures on the electrical
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the electrical system checked.
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
Operation With A Trailer
The system is automatically deactivated when the trailer’s
electric plug is inserted in the vehicle’s tow hook socket.
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer’s cable plug is removed.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the Side
Distance Warning System:
NOTE:
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the message to appear in
the instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE
OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle
the ignition key.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio
when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the parking sen-
sors. Before using the ParkSense system, it is recom-
mended to remove the removable tow hook ball assem-
bly and any attachments from the vehicle when it is not
used for towing operations. If you wish to leave the tow
hook fitted without towing a trailer, it is advisable to
contact your authorized dealer for the ParkSense system
update operations because the tow hook could be de-
tected as an obstacle by the central sensors.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during Parallel, Perpendicular, and Paral-
lel Park Exit maneuvers by identifying a proper parking
space, providing audible/visual instructions, and control-
ling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver se-
lection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular
parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger
side), as well as exiting a parallel parking space.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver touches
the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel,
and the driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. envi-
ronmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will
absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist sys-
tem, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns
off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active
steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space.
• Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Driver’s door is opened.
• Rear liftgate is opened.
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and RE-
VERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within the
maximum amount of shifts, the system will cancel and
the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following condi-
tions are present:
• Gear position is in DRIVE.
• Ignition is in the RUN position.
• ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
• Driver’s door is closed.
• Rear liftgate is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven
above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will
cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear
fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud,
dirt or other obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present.
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press
or to
Switch Maneuver” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display. You may switch to perpendicular
parking or Parallel Park Exit if you desire. The arrow
buttons on the left side of the steering wheel can be used
to switch parking maneuvers.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Active ParkSense Searching
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
sequence.
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The Active ParkSense System will allow a maximum
amount of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE, and
then the system will cancel and the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to complete the maneu-
ver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. The
⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position⬙
message will be momentarily displayed. When the maneu-
ver is complete, the driver will be instructed to check the
vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is satisfied with the
vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press
or to
Switch Maneuver” message will show in the instrument
cluster display. The arrow buttons on the left side of the
steering wheel can be used to switch parking maneu-
vers. You may switch to parallel parking, or Parallel
Park Exit, if you desire. Refer to “Exiting The Parking
Space” in this section for more information.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Active ParkSense Searching Display
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal
indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to
perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active
Park Assist system will automatically search for a park-
ing space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle if the
turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking
space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any
obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding
into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular parking
sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel.
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands removed
from the steering wheel, you will be instructed to place the
gear selector into the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel Space Found — Shift To Reverse
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
NOTE:
• It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The Active ParkSense System will allow a maximum
number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the
maneuver cannot be completed, the system will cancel
and the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance
into the parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them
to slow down. The driver is then responsible for com-
pleting the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — STOP
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the DRIVE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move forward.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
NOTE: It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake and
stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surround-
ings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
Check Surroundings — STOP
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
When the driver places the gear selector into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving for-
ward. You are responsible for safety and must continue
to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
Exiting The Parking Space
NOTE: The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel parking
spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, push the Active ParkSense hard
switch and then use the steering wheel arrow buttons to
select the Parallel Park Exit feature. After the selection, the
system activates and warns the driver on the instrument
panel display about the operations that have to be carried
out to perform the maneuver correctly.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side
Use the right and left arrow buttons on the steering wheel
to select between parallel or perpendicular parking mode.
Then use the direction indicators (turn signals) to choose
the direction that you want to perform the maneuver.
To Exit Space Use Turn Signal And Shift To Reverse —
Press Left Or Right to Switch Maneuver
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
During the maneuver, the system asks to shift to REVERSE,
select the direction indicator in the direction you want to
exit. Let go of the steering wheel and press the dedicated
pedals, while the system handles the steering automati-
cally for exiting the parking space. If the driver continues
to carry out a voluntary or involuntary action on the
steering wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or
holding the steering wheel to prevent its movement), the
maneuver will be interrupted.
Check Surroundings — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check Surroundings — Move Backward Check Surroundings — Stop
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — Stop
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the end of
the maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle control to
the driver.
Important Information
• If the sensors undergo impact which alters their posi-
tion, the system operation could be greatly affected.
• The sensors reach top performance after the vehicle has
gone about 30 miles (50 km) due to the dynamic tire
circumference calculations used for parking.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward Active ParkSense Complete Check Surroundings
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle (echo noise)
due to mechanical noises, for example while washing
the vehicle or in the case of rain, strong wind, and hail.
• The sensors may not detect objects of a particular shape
or made from particular materials (very thin poles,
trailer beams, panels, nets, bushes, anti-parking posts,
pavements, rubbish bins, motor vehicles, etc.). Always
take great care to check that the vehicle and its path are
actually compatible with the parking place identified by
the system.
• The use of wheels and tires that are different size to the
original equipment could affect the operation of the
system.
• The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deac-
tivated when the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the
vehicle’s tow hook socket, while the front sensors stay
active and can provide acoustic and visual warnings.
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer’s cable plug is removed.
• In ⬙Search in progress⬙ mode, the system could incor-
rectly identify a parking place to carry out the maneuver
(e.g. by a junction, driveways, roads crossing the direc-
tion of travel, etc.).
• In the case of parking maneuvers on roads on a slope,
the performance of the system could be inferior and it
may deactivate.
• If a parking maneuver is being carried out between two
parked vehicles alongside the pavement, the system
may cause the vehicle to mount the pavement.
• Some maneuvers at very tight bends might be impos-
sible to be carried out.
• Take great care to ensure that conditions do not change
during the parking maneuver (e.g. if there are persons
and/or animals in the parking place, moving vehicles,
etc.) and intervene immediately if necessary.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
• During parking maneuvers, pay attention to vehicles
approaching from the opposite direction. Always abide
by the law and road regulations.
NOTE:
• Correct system operation is not guaranteed if snow
chains or the space-saver wheel are fitted.
• The function only informs the driver about the last
appropriate parking place (parallel or perpendicular)
detected by the parking sensors.
• Some messages displayed are accompanied by acoustic
warnings.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off.
The LaneSense button is located on the center stack.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the Lane-
Sense button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On”
message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unin-
tentional lane departure occurs.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid
white. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green
to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane, the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time, torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane, the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unin-
tentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” for further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, for-
ward collision warning, etc.).
REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen
image of your vehicle’s rear surroundings when the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen display along with a note to “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. The camera is located
above the rear license plate.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of RE-
VERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched
to the OFF position.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, a touchscreen
⬙X⬙ button is overlapped to the camera image in order to
disable the visualization earlier than 10 seconds.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
Parking Camera
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up Camera
should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear Back
Up Camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using the Rear Back Up Camera to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using the Rear Back Up
Camera.
ADDING FUEL
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler
pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically
upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.
The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it prevents the
filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Opening The Door
For filling proceed as follows:
• Open the door, by pushing and releasing on the inden-
tation point indicated by the arrow.
• Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and proceed with
filling the fuel tank.
• Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10 seconds to
allow the fuel to flow inside of the tank.
• Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then close the
door.
Fuel Filler Door
Filling Procedure
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Emergency Refueling Procedure
If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:
• Open the liftgate and remove the emergency fuel fill
funnel located in the cargo area.
• Open the fuel door.
• Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the filler pipe and
proceed to fill the fuel tank.
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel – If Equipped With Full Size
Spare Tire
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
• Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and close the
door.
• Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of the filler
neck other than is provided on the car.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The use of objects/plugs do not comply with the
vehicle and may cause pressure increases inside the
tank, creating dangerous conditions.
• Do not approach the neck of the tank with open
flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme fire hazard.
Also, avoid close contact with the filler pipe with
your face, do not inhale harmful vapors.
• Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of the
pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible risk of fire.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tempo-
rary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addi-
tion of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
formance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
1.3L Turbo 2000 lbs (906 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
2.4L 2000 lbs (906 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety In-
formation” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When traile-
ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, sus-
pension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Serving And Mainte-
nance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Serving And Maintenance” for the proper inspection
procedure.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Serving And Maintenance” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible per-
sonal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the high-
est gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheat-
ing, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
TOWING CONDITION
WHEELS OFF THE
GROUND
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
(FWD)
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Recreational Towing
Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all
four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the transmis-
sion in PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
• Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do not start the
engine.
• Press and hold the brake pedal.
• Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
• Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drive-
train will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may
be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four
wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a nar-
rower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design character-
istics give them a higher center of gravity than conven-
tional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-
road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascend-
ing or descending steep hills, and to increase low-speed
pulling power (refer to “Four Wheel Drive” in this section
for further details). This range should be limited to extreme
situations such as deep snow, mud, or sand where addi-
tional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds
in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through
water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed
with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave
effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water,
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are down-
stream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water — Trailhawk Only
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 19 inches (48
cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer
Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky,
foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon
as possible to prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four Wheel
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Drive” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and shift
to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill -
drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System
to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if
equipped (refer to ⬙Electronic Brake Control System⬙ in this
section for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............367
䡵 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .367
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................372
▫ General Information .....................372
▫ Replacement Bulbs ......................373
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................374
▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs ..................388
䡵 FUSES ................................393
▫ General Information .....................394
▫ Access To The Fuses .....................394
▫ Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit . .395
▫ Body Computer Fuse Center ...............400
▫ Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit ......403
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...........405
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ...........405
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................406
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................407
▫ Road Tire Installation ....................412
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........413
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage...................413
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .413
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ...........415
▫ Replacing The Sealant....................416
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................416
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............417
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................418
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY...............419
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEA
TS .............419
7
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............420
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............422
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............423
▫ Front Wheel Drive (FWD) .................424
▫ Four Wheel Drive (4WD) .................425
▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .......426
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................427
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............427
366 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch
bank below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in OFF mode.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and
a SOS button.
Assist And SOS Buttons
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 367
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and as-
sume all risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian service is active and
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there
will be a ten second delay before the SOS Call system
initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on the overhead
console or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the overhead console.
368 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green once a
connection to a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a SOS op-
erator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if addi-
tional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS
Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS
operator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
tion.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 369
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception
is required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electri-
cal system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER
AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is de-
tected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The overhead console light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message:
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
370 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the overhead console light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead
console light is illuminated, have your authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have your
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-
structed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 371
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required
for the SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Information
• Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to be sure
they are not oxidized.
• Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.
• After replacing a light bulb, always check the correct
orientation.
• Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning, check
that the fuse is intact.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric condi-
tions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps (LED Version) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)/Front
Turn Indicator
PY24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps (If Equipped With LED
Headlamps)
PY24W
Front Fog Lamps H11
Front Fog Lamps (LED Versions) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
Lamps Bulb Number
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators (LED Versions) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Reverse W16W
License Plate Lamp W5W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
CAUTION!
During bulb replacement do not touch the new glass
bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will se-
verely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact
with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing
alcohol.
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the engine compartment and remove the head-
lamp bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise then
pull outwards.
3. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connector
and remove the bulb and socket.
Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb Connector
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is prop-
erly locked.
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it clockwise
making sure it is properly locked.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with
the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold,
to avoid the danger of burns.
LED Headlamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
Headlamp Bulb
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the electrical connector.
4. Releasing the two tabs, and remove the bulb and bulb
socket from the housing.
5. Install the new bulb and socket into the housing, and
engage the two tabs, making sure that it is properly
locked.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
Front Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly
1 — Bulb Socket
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace the
bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the bulb
is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
LED Front Fog Lamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Side Indicators
Front Side Indicators
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Operating from inside the engine compartment using a
suitable tool release the retaining clip.
Fog Light Assembly
1 — Bulb Socket
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Bulb
Lamp Retaining Clip
378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Remove lamp assembly by sliding it toward the outside. 3. Remove the electrical connector by pushing the tab then
disconnect the electrical connector.
Lamp Assembly
Electrical Connector
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
4. Rotate counterclockwise to release the bulb socket from
the lamp assembly, and remove it.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
6. Insert the new bulb in the socket.
7. Reinstall the bulb and socket into the lamp assembly by
turning it clockwise, making sure it is locked into place.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly on the car, making sure it is
locked into place.
Bulb Socket
Bulb
380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors – (If
Equipped)
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline. For the
replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you
contact your authorized dealer.
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view mirror.
Mirror Cap
Removing the mirror cap
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown.
3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the transparent
lens assembly by rotating the socket counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the
bulb straight out.
Transparent Lens
Transparent Lens Assembly
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into
place.
6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent lens assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror,
making sure it is locked into place.
Rear Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
• Position lights
• Stop lights
• Direction indicator
• REVERSE lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the door as shown.
Bulb And Socket Assembly
1 — Bulb
2 — Bulb Socket
Trim Panel Door
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
3. Using a suitable tool remove fastener.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the re-
lease.
5. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward the outside
as shown.
Rear Lamp Fastener and Electrical Connector
1 — Fastener
2 — Electrical Connector
Tail Lamp Removal
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Unscrew the screws and remove the rear tail lamp
holder.
7. Replace the bulb as necessary.
Rear Lamp Assembly
1 — Mounting Screws
Rear Tail Lamp Holder
1 — Tail Light
2 — Reverse Bulb
3 — Position Light/Stop Light/Turn Signal
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
8. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
9. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear tail lamp
housing, tightening the screws.
10. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the car.
11. Secure the fastener of the rear tail lamp and reconnect
the electrical connector.
12. Reinstall the door making sure it locked into place.
13. Finally close the tailgate.
LED Rear Tail Lamps – If Equipped
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Reverse Lights – If Equipped With LED Tail Lamps
1. Use a suitable tool to remove the screws and remove the
access door.
Reverse Light Access
1—Screw
2—Screw
3 — Access Door
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace the
bulb.
4. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the bulb
is locked into place.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access door.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL is LED. For replacement see an authorized
dealer.
License Plate Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens.
Reverse Light Assembly
1 — Bulb
License Plate Light Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.
3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are properly
locked between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
NOTE: If removing the license plate lens using a screw-
driver, be sure to cover the tip of the screwdriver with a
cloth so no damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle
paint.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light as
shown.
License Plate Light
Front Courtesy Light Housing
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb hous-
ing.
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are properly
locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light housing
making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is
properly locked.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the visor mirror
light cover.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, and
then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is properly
locked between the contacts.
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that it
is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
Visor
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
Bulb Removal/Installation
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp assembly at both
the ends.
2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Dome Light — MY SKY
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown remove the
dome light.
Rear Dome Light Housing
1 — Bulb
2 — Flap
Retractable Roof Light
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side contacts.
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the luggage compartment and remove the dome
light assembly.
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.
Bulb
Light Cover
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Before proceeding with the replacement of the lamp
wait for the exhaust pipes are cool: DANGER OF
BURNS!
• Modifications or repair of the electrical system per-
formed incorrectly and without taking into account
the technical characteristics can cause malfunctions
with the risk of fire.
• Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of
fragments of glass.
• Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact
with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted
light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In
case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth
dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the electri-
cal circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
Also please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Fuse Removal
To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the fuse
cover (located on the inside of the engine compartment
fuse cover.)
Access To The Fuses
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the
engine compartment, under the instrument panel and on
the inside of the left side cargo trim panel.
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
Fuse Extractor Location
394 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
• Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
• Slowly release the screw.
• Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Engine Compartment Fuse Cavities
Fuse Panel & Cover Location
1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 395
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
• Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide com-
pletely from top to bottom.
• Fully depress the screw, using the special screwdriver
supplied.
• Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
• Release the screw.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Com-
puter
F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Com-
puter, Rear Distribu-
tion Unit
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
396 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power
Supply Body Com-
puter
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Elec-
tronics Module
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-
Assisted Steering
F06 20 Amp Yellow –
2.4L Engine
70 Amp Tan – 1.3L
Turbo Engine
– – Engine Cooling Fan
F07 50 Amp Red – 2.4L
Engine
– – Engine Cooling Fan
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmis-
sion, GSM
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module En-
gine
F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – – 5 Amp Tan – 1.3L
Turbo Engine
25 Amp Clear – 2.4L
Engine
Supply Secondary
Loads
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 397
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F14 – – 15 Amp Blue – 1.3L
Turbo Engine
WCAC Pump/Active
Grille Shutters
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Mod-
ule Pump
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Mod-
ule Power, Automatic
Transmission
F17 – – 30 Amp Green –
1.3L Turbo Engine
15 Amp Blue – 2.4L
Engine
Supply Primary
Loads
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner
Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power
Four-Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – – 10 Amp Red – 1.3L
Turbo Engine
20 Amp Yellow –
2.4L Engine
Power Control Mod-
ule Engine
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield –
If Equipped
398 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Sup-
ply Automatic Trans-
mission
F82 – – 20 Amp Yellow –
1.3L Turbo Engine
Power Control Mod-
ule Engine
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All
Wheel Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Auto-
matic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mir-
rors
F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery
State Of Charge)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 399
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering
column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see an authorized dealer.
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
400 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front
Seats/Fan Air Conditioning
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger
Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side)
F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Condi-
tioning, USB Port, Rear Ceiling
Lights (With Sunroof), E-Call, SGW
F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision
Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive
(AWD), IPC, Brake Pedal Switch
(NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Power Under Lock and Key, Brake
Control Electronics Module, Electric
Power-Assisted Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 401
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Supply ParkSense, SGW, Mirror,
Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery,
ESC System, S&S Inhibition Com-
mand, Blind Spot, Rain/Light Sensor,
Humidity Sensor
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
F51 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning, Lane Departure
Warning, Terrain Selector, Backup
Lights Switch (MT), Trailer Tow
Module, Compass Module, Rear
View Camera
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System
Keyless Enter-N-Go
F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket
402 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left
rear panel of the rear cargo area.
The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse holder No. 1
and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped with trailer towing) are
located closest to the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 403
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter
F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System
F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat
(Driver Side)
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats
On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse for the sun
visor of the retractable roof.
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On
Trailer
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights
(Drivers Side)
F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights
(Passenger Side)
404 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and tools are located in the rear storage compart-
ment if equipped, inside a special container.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Jack And Tools
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Chocks
5 — Screwdriver
6 — Emergency Allen Key
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 405
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
4. Remove the chocks.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
6. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmis-
sion) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
Load Floor Handle
406 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake and place an automatic
transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 407
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap covers the
wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center
cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the jacking location that is
closest to the flat tire. Jacking location is indicated by a
stamped arrow on the body. Turn the jack screw clock-
wise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of
the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout
in the sill cladding.
Jack Warning Label
Jacking Locations
408 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jacking Location
Front Jacking Engagement Point
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 409
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Engagement Point
410 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare
tire or a limited — use spare tire. For further informa-
tion refer to “Tires — General Information” in “Servic-
ing And Maintenance”.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
Mounting Spare Tire
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 411
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”
for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end
of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
Properly Stowed Tire
412 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in the “Technical Specifications”
section for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or service station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks.
Stow the jack and tools back in the proper storage
location. Release the Electric Park Brake before driving
the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage compart-
ment inside a storage container. Located inside the con-
tainer are a screwdriver and the emergency fuel funnel. To
access the Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and remove the
load floor.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair
using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear storage
compartment inside the storage container.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Plug (Located On Bottom Side Of Tire Service Kit)
2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Power Button
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Warning Label
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 413
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw
the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
socket. Start the vehicle engine.
3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I”
position. The electric compressor will be turned on,
sealant and air will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle
30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the
sealant inside the tire.
4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving
the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If
the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, and contact the nearest
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have
the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized
dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
continue driving.
5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire
has been treated with Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
414 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 415
Replacing The Sealant
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
date at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and
serious injury or death.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
416 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protec-
tive cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
battery post.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL)
and place the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Positive Battery Post
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 417
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
418 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is described
in the “Emergency Refueling Procedure”. Refer to “Adding
Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the appro-
priate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 419
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Carefully separate the gear selector boot assembly from
the bezel.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
420 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the
gear selector override access hole (at the right front
corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold
the override release lever down.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot on the bezel.
Removing Gear Selector Bezel
Gear Selector Override Location
1 — Gear Selector Override Access Hole
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 421
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with auto-
matic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE
(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved
at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE
or REVERSE.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Safety” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
422 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF
The Ground
FWD MODELS
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 423
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK so
that the vehicle can be moved.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
424 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal dam-
age to the transmission or power transfer unit will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 425
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle.
The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle.
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without open-
ing the door. During towing remember that not having the
aid of the power brakes and the electromechanical power
steering, greater force is needed in applying the brakes and
steering of the vehicle.
Front Tow Hook Locations
Rear Tow Hook Location
426 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 427
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................431
▫ Maintenance Plan.......................432
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................438
▫ 1.3L Turbo Engine ......................438
▫ 2.4L Engine ...........................439
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................440
▫ Cooling System ........................440
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................441
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................441
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................442
▫ Engine Oil ...........................442
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................444
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................444
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............445
▫ Body Lubrication ......................446
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................446
▫ Exhaust System ........................448
▫ Cooling System ........................450
▫ Brake System .........................454
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........456
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ......456
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................458
䡵 TIRES ................................458
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................458
▫ Tires — General Information ..............468
▫ Tire Types ............................474
▫ Spare Tir
es — If Equipped ................475
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............477
8
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............478
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations ............480
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................481
▫ Treadwear ............................481
▫ Traction Grades ........................482
▫ Temperature Grades .....................482
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE ..................482
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................483
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........483
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........484
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................484
䡵 INTERIORS ............................485
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................485
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................486
▫ Leather Parts ..........................487
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................487
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350 hours
of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
NOTE: The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under
these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake
master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as re-
quired.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Rotate the tires, Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road
conditions.
Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the following page for
the required maintenance intervals.
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check tire condition/wear and
adjust pressure, if necessary,
check Tire Service Kit expiration
date (if equipped).
•••••••••••• • • •
Check operation of lighting sys-
tem (headlamps, direction indi-
cators, hazard warning lights,
luggage compartment, passen-
ger compartment, glove com-
partment, instrument panel
warning lights, etc.).
•••••••••••• • • •
Check and, if necessary, top up
fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic
clutch, windshield washer, bat-
tery, engine coolant, etc.).1
•••••••••••• • • •
Check engine control system
operation (via diagnostic tool).2
•••••••••••• • • •
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Visually inspect condition of:
exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (ex-
haust - fuel system - brakes),
rubber elements (boots,
sleeves, bushings, etc.).
•• ••• • • •
Check windshield/rear window
wiper blade position/wear.
•• ••• • • •
Check operation of windshield
washer system and adjust jets if
necessary.
•• ••• • • •
Check cleanliness of hood and
tailgate locks and cleanliness
and lubrication of linkages.
•••• • • •
Visually check the condition and
wear of the front and rear
brakes.
•••••••••••• • • •
Check the front suspension, tie
rods, CV joints and replace if
necessary.
•••• • • •
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Visual inspect the condition of
the accessory drive belt.3
•• •
Check the tension of the acces-
sory drive belt.
••
Inspect and replace, if required,
front end accessory drive belt,
tensioner, and, idler pulley.3
••
Inspect and replace PCV valve
if necessary.
•
Change engine oil and replace
oil filter.*
Inspect the PTU fluid level. •• •
Inspect the rear differential fluid
level.
•• •
Replace spark plugs (1.3L
Turbo Engine)**
•• •
Replace spark plugs (2.4L En-
gine)**
•
Replace engine air filter. # •••• • • •
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace brake fluid every two
years. ***
•••• • • •
Replace cabin filter. ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○
Change the manual transmis-
sion fluid if using your vehicle
for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, po-
lice, delivery service (commer-
cial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of
your driving is at sustained
speeds during hot weather,
above 90°F (32°C).
••
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
••
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
䡩 Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
# The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil
change if used in dusty areas.
* The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out
when indicated by a warning light or message on the
instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year
or 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
** The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly
intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure
correct operation and prevent serious damage to the en-
gine:
• Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which
are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Fluids
and Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further
information).
• Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval
given in the “Maintenance Schedule” for spark plug
replacement.
• Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
*** The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
1
Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for
topping up after having checked that the system is not damage.
2 If the engine oil quality detected by the vehicle diagnos-
tics is lower than 20%, it is advisable to replace the engine
oil and engine filter in order to avoid another service
operation after a short time.
3 The maximum mileage is 75000 miles (120,000 km). The
belt must be replaced every 6 years, regardless of distance
travelled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions (dusty
areas, cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling),
the maximum mileage is 37,500 miles (60,000 km). The belt
must be replaced every 4 years regardless of the mileage.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L Turbo Engine
1 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Battery 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and
the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to
“Engine Compartment” in this section for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and
the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.3L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for turbo-
charged engines under all types of operating conditions,
the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-13340.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only rec-
ommends 0W-20 engine oils that are API Certified and
meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.3L Turbo
Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS synthetic engine oil approved
to FCA Material Standard MS-13340 such as Pennzoil, Shell
Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equiva-
lent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
NOTE:
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable
and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrig-
erants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requir-
ing costly repairs. Refer to the Warranty Information
Book for further warranty information.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable
and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrig-
erants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requir-
ing costly repairs.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or dam-
age to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
See your authorized dealer for service.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed in
a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily
changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must be
in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position.
Service mode must be activated within two minutes after
the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service Position
command (antipanic) must be active for at least half a
second.
At every valid activation of Service Position command, the
wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to a
maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
• The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position.
• Number of subsequent activations is three.
• Two minutes timer has expired after turning the ignition
OFF.
NOTE: When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go
into the parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper blade
until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper blade
end while pushing the wiper blade towards the liftgate
glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder on the wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
1—WiperBlade
2 — Release Button
3—WiperArm
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact an local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when
the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the
brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require fluid
replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid
reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any
leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the
hydraulic clutch release system. See an authorized dealer
for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the “Technical Specifica-
tions” section for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the “Technical
Specifications” section for further information. Us-
ing the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch
system performance. Improper brake fluids may dam-
age the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch func-
tion and the ability to shift the transmission.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
The lifting points on the vehicle are marked on side skirts
with symbols (
see example shown).
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Lifting Point Locations
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
–
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
–
⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
–
⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
–
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
–
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cer-
tain operating conditions
–
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating condi-
tions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-
type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Tires may look prop-
erly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experi-
enced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with
another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure
sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is
changed after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be
reused when driven under run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa))
condition.
NOTE: TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further
information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 473
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
474 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in “Starting
And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare
tire designated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 475
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
476 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neu-
tral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to
always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 477
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices
are recommended:
478 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
All Models:
• The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted with the use of
215/65R16 tires only. Chain front tires ONLY. All other
size tires are NOT chainable.
• No other tire sizes can be chained.
CAUTION!
• Use on front tires ONLY.
• Damage may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 479
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method
is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram.
This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
480 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 481
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During
storage check battery charge quarterly.
482 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every thirty days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protec-
tive waxes.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades
and leave raised from the glass.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care
not to damage the painted surface by dragging across
dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not
allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface
of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+50 kPa)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and check
it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the engine for approximately five
minutes with the air conditioning system on and high
fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of the
system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the
compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven for
at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals
to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the drivers door is closed.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic
locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in
snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the
metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other
extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint,
metal trim, and underbody protection.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 483
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
484 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 485
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
486 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 487
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ................490
▫ Chassis Number........................490
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................490
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .491
▫ Torque Specifications ....................491
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................492
▫ 1.3L Turbo Engine ......................492
▫ 2.4L Engine ...........................493
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................493
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............493
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.........494
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......494
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................494
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................495
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................495
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............496
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................497
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................498
▫ Engine ..............................498
▫ Chassis .............................499
9
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Chassis Number
The chassis number (VIN) is stamped on a plate located on
the left front corner of the instrument panel cover, which is
visible from outside the car through the windshield.
This number is also stamped on the floor of the passenger
compartment, near the right front seat.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
490 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Wheel Bolt Torque **Wheel Bolt
Size
Wheel Bolt
Socket Size
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m) M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only an authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 491
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each bolt has
been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully en-
gaged on the lug nut/bolt.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.3L Turbo Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance, when using high-
quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
having an octane rating of 87, as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of a 91 or higher octane “premium” gasoline will
allow these engines to operate to optimal performance. This
increase in performance is most noticeable in hot weather or
other heavier load conditions, such as while towing.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immedi-
ately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Torque Patterns
492 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.4L Engine
All available gasoline engines are de-
signed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having a
octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2
method. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformu-
lated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illu-
minate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 493
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
494 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 495
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
496 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.3L Turbo / 2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Turbo Engine (SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS Synthetic, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.3 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
1.3L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula)
8.8 Quarts 8.3 Liters
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula)
6.8 Quarts 6.5 Quarts
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 497
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 1.3L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS API Certi-
fied Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-13340 such as Mopar, Penn-
zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer
to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.3L Turbo Engine
87 Octane (R+M)/2, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
498 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual
Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmis-
sion.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Syn-
thetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Syn-
thetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regard-
less of mileage.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 499
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................503
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ...............503
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................504
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................505
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3
and 4 Settings .........................506
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Settings . . . .524
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......545
▫ Radio Operation........................545
▫ Media Mode ..........................545
䡵 USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................546
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .547
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........547
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS .................................548
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................548
▫ Get Started ...........................550
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................551
▫ Radio ...............................551
▫ Media ...............................553
▫ Phone ...............................555
▫ Voice Text Reply — If Equipped ............557
▫ Climate ..............................558
▫ Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped .........560
▫ SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) —
If Equipped ...........................561
▫ Register (4C/4C NAV) ...................561
10
▫ Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV) .....562
▫ Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) ................562
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV).............563
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............563
▫ Using Do Not Disturb ...................564
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ..............565
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..............567
▫ General Information .....................568
▫ Additional Information ...................569
502 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new shortcut will now be an active App/shortcut on
the main menu bar.
Uconnect 4 Apps Menu
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Apps Menu
10
MULTIMEDIA 503
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
504 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (U.S. Resi-
dents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents)
to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Pri-
vacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many fea-
tures can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
touchscreen.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below, and beside the
Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In
addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the
right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus
and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Mute
buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the face-
plate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button on the faceplate to exit out of
a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
10
MULTIMEDIA 505
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3
and 4 Settings
Push the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available program-
mable features.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
506 MULTIMEDIA
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous
menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the “ON/RUN” position.
The following tables list the settings that may be found
within the Uconnect 3 or Uconnect 4 system, along with the
selectable options pertaining to each setting.
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Espanol Francais
10
MULTIMEDIA 507
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With
Headlights ON
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With
Headlights OFF
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
508 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE: When US is selected, Distance is set on miles, Fuel Consumption is set on MPG (US), Pressure is set on psi,
and Temperature is set on °F. When Metric is selected, Distance is set on km, Fuel Consumption is set on L/100 km,
Pressure is set on bar, and Temperature is set on °C.
After pressing the “Custom” button with “Units” on the
touchscreen, you may select from the following menu
items:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Distance — If
Equipped
mi km
Fuel Consumption
— If Equipped
MPG (US) MPG (UK)
Pressure — If
Equipped
psi kPa bar
Temperature — If
Equipped
°C °F
10
MULTIMEDIA 509
Voice — If Equipped
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time And Format 12 hour 24 hour
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the
correct time.
Show Time Status On Off
Set Date (MM/DD/YY) -+
NOTE:
This feature allows you to set the date, month, and year using the plus and minus buttons.
Sync Date— If Equipped On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
510 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
10
MULTIMEDIA 511
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Off Only Warning Warning + Active Warn-
ing
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is
selected a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure
is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of poten-
tial forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning Sensi-
tivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in
front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives
you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
512 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkSense — If Equipped Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Front ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) not operating to specification.
Side Distance Warning Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Side Distance Warning Volume Low Med High
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 513
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen the
following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Brake Service Yes No
Auto Park Brake On Off
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lighting — If
Equipped
+-
Headlight Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
NOTE:
•
When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels.
•
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting
on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). To change the Headlight Sensitivity set-
ting, press the “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen to select your desired Headlight Sensitivity level.
514 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delays — If
Equipped
0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
Greeting Lights — If Equipped On Off
Automatic High Beam Headlamps
— If Equipped
On Off
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on while the engine is running.
Cornering Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on,
a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 515
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK
or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Horn With Remote Start — If
Equipped
On Off
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE: This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
516 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Remote Door Unlock— If Equipped Driver All
NOTE:
•
When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
•
If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
“Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the
handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior
door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
10
MULTIMEDIA 517
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped +–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 sec-
onds when exiting the vehicle.
Radio Off Delay — If Equipped +–
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the com-
pass variance zone should be set for best results.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Compass Variance 123456789101112131415
When the “Compass Variance” feature is selected, it allows the compass variance to be set to any number from 1 to
15 per the compass variance zone map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differ-
ences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide the most
accurate compass headings.
518 MULTIMEDIA
Compass Calibration Start
NOTE:
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“Yes” button on the touchscreen and complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or me-
tallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
Keep magnetic materials away from the rear view mirror, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This
is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false
readings.
Compass Variance Zone Map
10
MULTIMEDIA 519
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on
the desired setting.
Balance/Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness — If Equipped On Off
Auto-On Radio — If Equipped On Off Recall Last
NOTE:
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door On Off
AUX Volume Offset On Off
AutoPlay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When activated, the “AutoPlay” setting automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is
connected.
520 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones and Devices List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 521
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
SXM Tune Start On Off
NOTE: The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music chan-
nel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset
is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except
that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touch-
screen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
522 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings to Default Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to reset your settings to default?”
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
10
MULTIMEDIA 523
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Settings
Press the Settings button to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped such
as Language, Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings Defaults, Clear
Personal Data and System Information.
NOTE: Depending on the vehicles options, feature set-
tings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen
to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
524 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Espanol Francais
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Espa-
ñol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set
Language” button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
10
MULTIMEDIA 525
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
+-
NOTE:
To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior
dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Set Theme List of Themes
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection,
press the ⬙Set Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark ap-
pears showing that the setting has been selected.
526 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before
the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Fuel Saver Display in Cluster On Off
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Dis-
played in Cluster
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the in-
strument cluster display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 527
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display. The following selectable
units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE: When US is selected, Distance is set on miles, Fuel Consumption is set on MPG (US), Pressure is set on psi,
and Temperature is set on °F. When Metric is selected, Distance is set on km, Fuel Consumption is set on L/100 km,
Pressure is set on bar, and Temperature is set on °C.
528 MULTIMEDIA
After pressing the “Custom” button with “Units” on the
touchscreen, you may select from the following menu
items:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK)
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °C °F
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
10
MULTIMEDIA 529
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes +-
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync time with GPS” button on the touch-
screen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
AM FM
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Set Date (MM/DD/YY) +-
530 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the “Camera” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image
with dynamic grid lines for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled
if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guide Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or
dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its project back up path, based on the steering
wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist
with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
10
MULTIMEDIA 531
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will re-
main off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is
selected a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure
is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of poten-
tial forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity —
If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle
directly in front of you needs to be at, before the system warns you of a possible collision with the vehicle directly in
front of you, based on the option is selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives
you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
532 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering
wheel feedback, of a possible lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Front ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights + Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is activated and will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors, or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged,
the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sen-
sor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Side Distance Warning Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Side Distance Warning Volume Low Med High
10
MULTIMEDIA 533
Mirror and Wipers
After pressing the “Mirror and Wipers” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Park Brake On Off
Brake Service Yes No
NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking whether or you would like to retract the park
brakes to all break system service.
534 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lighting +-
Headlight Off Delay 0306090
Headlight Illumination on Approach 0306090
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Greeting Lights — If Equipped On Off
Auto High Beams — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped Yes No
Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped On Off
Headlight Dip — If Equipped On Off
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Flash Lights With Sliding Door — If Equipped On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 535
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Lock Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit Yes No
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped Yes No
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped Yes No
1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
Passive Entry — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE: This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to press the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
536 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start”
button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be
available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated
Seat & Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
10
MULTIMEDIA 537
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped +–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 sec-
onds when exiting the vehicle.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension On Off
Radio Off Delay 0 MIN 20 MIN
Radio Off With Door — If
Equipped
On Off
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon”
toward any location in the box.
538 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as
press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped +-
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay On Off
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connect device as soon as it is
connected.
Radio Off With Door On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 539
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed
in Cluster
On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text, or both, to any incoming
call, or text, before sending it directly to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the
road.
Auto Reply Text Call Both
Auto Reply Message Default Custom
Customize Auto Reply
Message
Customize Message
Paired Phones And Audio
Sources
List Of Paired Phones And Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones And Audio Sources” feature shows which phones or media devices are paired to the Phone/
Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
540 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Smartphone Projection
Manager
List Of Connected Phones
NOTE:
Pressing “Smartphone Projection Manager” feature allows you to see a list of all connected phones and gives you the
option to determine which phone will be used for projection (Apple CarPlay or Android Auto).
Smartphone Device Mir-
roring
On Off
Enable Android Auto On Off
Autoshow Display Upon
Connection
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 541
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
SXM Tune Start On Off
NOTE: The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music chan-
nel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset
is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except
that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touch-
screen, select the channels you would like to skip.
542 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name Selectable Options
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
10
MULTIMEDIA 543
Reset
After pressing the “Reset” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to Default Order OK Cancel
Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and
presets.
Modem Reset Yes Cancel
544 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located at the rear of
the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the
switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button changes the source (AM, FM,
SXM, Bluetooth, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
10
MULTIMEDIA 545
USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an external device to be plugged into
the USB port or AUX Jack.
Located below the heating ventilation and air conditioning
controls is the front USB port and AUX jack.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
external USB support capability.
Rear Center Console USB Port
Located on the rear of the center console is a second USB
port.
NOTE: Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB port
may be charge only, or media file capable.
Front USB Port And AUX Jack
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
Rear Center Console USB (Charge Only) Port — If
Equipped
546 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
MULTIMEDIA 547
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4,
or Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 3
548 MULTIMEDIA
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the Apps
menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C
with 8.4-inch display system.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 549
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
• Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
• Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
• Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
• You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, Or Climate Func-
tions. For Uconnect 4C NAV System Only: Push To Begin Naviga-
tion Function
3 — Push To End Call
550 MULTIMEDIA
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Uconnect 3 Radio
10
MULTIMEDIA 551
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
552 MULTIMEDIA
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”;
“ Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 3 Media
10
MULTIMEDIA 553
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
554 MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the VR button
or Phone button . After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
button
or Phone button and say “ Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone
book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “ Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 3 Phone
10
MULTIMEDIA 555
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
556 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the VR
button
or Phone button (if enabled) and say
“ Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired
to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
VR button
or Phone button (if enabled). After
the beep, say: “ Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later. I need direc-
tions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25, 30,
45, 60> minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
NOTE: Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
10
MULTIMEDIA 557
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use
your voice to send a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free
and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “ Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
558 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 Climate Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
10
MULTIMEDIA 559
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say: “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
560 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call
and Roadside Assistance Call will NOT work without
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) net-
work connection compatible with your device.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services in the next
section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
touchscreen to get started.
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can only be used
where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of apps.
10
MULTIMEDIA 561
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian Customer Care agent who will activate ser-
vices in your vehicle, or select “Enter Email” to activate
on the web.
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit: www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report, which
summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems
so you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs
if you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle
will also send you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects
issues with its key systems that need your attention. For
further information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-
mands and sending a destination from your phone to your
vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
1. Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian
services, download the Uconnect App to your mobile
device. Use your Owner Account login and password to
open the app.
2. Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
Mobile App
562 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
4. Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner
of the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE: For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not
available for Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Show fuel prices”
• “ Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “ Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and re-
sponds back to confirm your requests. The system is
SiriusXM Travel Link
10
MULTIMEDIA 563
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls
and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri Eyes Free
Available
564 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text mes-
sage, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and
send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being inter-
rupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen
on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
10
MULTIMEDIA 565
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running Android
5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on Google Play.
Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are trademarks
of Google Inc.
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
566 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps — if equipped
• Additional Apps — if equipped
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
10
MULTIMEDIA 567
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
568 MULTIMEDIA
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or call:
1-800-465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit www.siriusxm.com/guardian or call:
1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian or
call: 1-877-324-9091
10
MULTIMEDIA 569
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................572
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............572
▫ Prepare A List .........................572
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............572
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................572
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............573
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........573
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................573
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........573
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................574
▫ Service Contract .......................574
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............575
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................575
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............575
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .575
▫ In Canada ............................576
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............576
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
572 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 573
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
574 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 575
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
576 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes .........................490
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . . .266
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............451
Adding Fuel ..............................343
Adding Washing Fluid.......................441
Additives, Fuel ............................495
Adjust
Forward ................................44
Rearward ...............................44
AirBag .................................195
Advance Front Air Bag ....................195
Air Bag Operation ........................196
Air Bag Warning Light .....................193
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................197
Enhanced Accident Response .............203, 427
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................427
FrontAirBag ...........................195
If Deployment Occurs .....................202
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................197
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............206
Maintenance ............................206
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............194
Side Air Bags ...........................198
Transporting Pets ........................224
Air Bag Light.......................130, 193, 226
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......444
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................445
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................445, 446
Air Conditioning ...........................446
Air Conditioning Filter ....................84, 446
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................83
Air Conditioning System .....................445
Air Pressure
Tires..................................469
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................30
Disarm The System ........................30
Security Alarm........................29, 133
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle .................................6
Android Auto .............................565
Antifreeze
(Engine Coolant) ................451, 497
Disposal ...............................453
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................146
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................134, 139
Apple CarPlay ............................567
Assist, Hill Start ...........................148
Audio Systems (Radio).......................503
Auto Down Power Windows ...................86
Automatic Headlights ........................57
578 INDEX
Automatic High Beams .......................57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............82
Automatic Transmission ..................246, 456
Adding Fluid ........................458, 499
Autostick ..............................248
Fluid And Filter Change ...................458
Fluid Change ...........................458
Fluid Level Check ........................457
Fluid Type ..........................456, 499
Special Additives .........................457
Auto Up Power Windows .....................87
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .........108
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................108
Axle Fluid ...............................499
Axle Lubrication ...........................499
Back-Up Camera ...........................341
Battery...............................131, 441
Charging System Light ....................131
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................19
Belts, Seat ................................226
Blind Spot Monitoring .......................158
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................446
B-Pillar Location ...........................464
Brake Assist System .........................147
Brake Control System, Electronic................147
Brake Fluid ...............................499
Brakes ..................................454
Brake System ..........................454, 490
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................490
Fluid Check ............................499
Master Cylinder .........................454
Warning Light ...........................130
Brightness, Interior Lights .....................59
Bulbs, Light ..............................228
Camera .................................341
Camera, Rear .............................341
Capacities, Fluid ...........................497
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ......................438,
443, 444
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................452
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................225, 496
Car Washes...............................484
Cellular Phone ............................547
Certification Label ..........................346
Changing A Flat Tire .....................405, 458
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................460
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .143
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............224
12
INDEX 579
Checks, Safety.............................224
Child Restraint ............................208
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ............................211
Child Seat Installation .....................221
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........218
Infant And Child Restraints .................210
LATCH Positions .........................213
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............216
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......213
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........210
Seating Positions .........................212
Child Safety Locks ..........................39
Clean Air Gasoline .........................493
Cleaning
Wheels ................................477
Climate Control ............................69
Automatic ..............................75
Manual ................................71
Clutch ..................................454
Fluid .................................454
Coin Holder ..............................112
Cold Weather Operation......................235
Compact Spare Tire .........................476
Connector
UCI ..................................546
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ...........546
Console .................................112
Floor .................................112
Contract, Service ...........................574
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............452
Cooling System.........................440, 450
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................451
Coolant Level ....................441, 450, 453
Cooling Capacity .........................497
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................453
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................450
Inspection ..............................453
Points To Remember ......................453
Pressure Cap ...........................
.452
Radiator Cap ...........................452
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......451, 497, 498
Corrosion Protection ........................483
Cruise Light ...........................141, 142
Cupholders ...............................113
Customer Assistance ........................572
Customer Programmable Features ...........506, 524
Cybersecurity .............................504
580 INDEX
Daytime Running Lights ......................56
Dealer Service .............................442
Defroster, Rear Window.......................67
Defroster, Windshield........................226
De-Icer, Remote Start .........................27
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...............................56
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .........................440, 442
Disabled Vehicle Towing .....................423
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................453
Do Not Disturb ............................564
Door Ajar.............................131, 132
Door Ajar Light ........................131, 132
Door Locks................................38
Drag And Drop Menu .......................503
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .....................40, 41
Driving..................................360
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........108
Electric Brake Control System ..................147
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................146
Electric Park Brake .........................237
Electric Parking Brake .......................237
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)................155
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........263
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............149
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........132
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................367
Jacking ............................405, 458
Jump Starting ...........................416
Overheating ............................419
Tow Hooks .............................426
Towing ................................423
Emission Control System Maintenance............143
Engine ..................................438
Air Cleaner .............................444
Break-In Recommendations .................236
Checking Oil Level ....................440,
442
Compartment ...........................438
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................498
Cooling ............................440, 450
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................225, 496
Fails To Start ............................234
Flooded, Starting .........................234
Fuel Requirements ........................492
Jump Starting ...........................416
Oil ............................442, 497, 498
12
INDEX 581
Oil Filler Cap .....................438, 443, 444
Oil Filter ...............................444
Oil Selection .........................443, 497
Overheating ............................419
Starting ...............................233
Engine Oil Viscosity.........................444
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ....................444
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........203, 427
Ethanol..................................493
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................225, 496
Exhaust System ........................225, 448
Exterior Lighting............................55
Exterior Lights ..........................55, 228
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................444
Air Conditioning ..........................84
Engine Oil ..........................444, 498
Engine Oil Disposal .......................444
Flashers
Hazard Warning .........................367
Turn Signals ......................59, 141, 228
Flash-To-Pass ..............................56
Flooded Engine Starting ......................234
Floor Console .............................112
Fluid, Brake ..............................499
Fluid Capacities............................497
Fluid Leaks...............................228
Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil ..........................440, 442
Fluids And Lubricants .......................498
Fog Lights ................................58
Fold-Flat Seats .............................40
Forward Collision Warning ................158, 166
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................422
Fuel ....................................492
Adding ...............................343
Additives ..............................495
Clean Air ..............................493
Ethanol ...............................493
Gasoline ...............................492
Gauge ................................135
Materials Added .........................495
Methanol ..............................493
Octane Rating ........................492,
498
Requirements ...........................492
Specifications ...........................498
Fuses ...................................393
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................493
582 INDEX
Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................492
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................493
Gauges
Fuel ..................................135
Gear Ranges ..............................243
Gear Selector Override.......................420
Glass Cleaning ............................487
Gross Axle Weight Rating .................348, 349
GVWR ..................................347
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................367
Headlights
Automatic ..............................57
Automatic High Beam ......................57
Cleaning ...............................484
Delay ..................................58
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........56
Lights On Reminder .......................58
Passing ................................56
Switch .................................55
Time Delay ..............................58
Head Restraints ............................48
Head Rests ................................48
Heated Mirrors .............................54
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch ......56
Hill Descent Control ........................156
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................156
Hill Start Assist ............................148
Hitches
Trailer Towing ...........................351
Holder, Coin ..............................112
Holder, Cup ..............................113
Hood Prop ................................95
Hood Release ..............................95
Ignition ..................................23
Switch .................................23
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................51, 367
Instrument Cluster ......................122, 141
Descriptions ............................141
Engine Oil Reset .........................122
Menu Items ............................123
Instrument Cluster Display....................120
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................486
Interior Appearance Care ....................
.485
Interior Lights..............................59
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)...............64
Introduction ................................4
Inverter
12
INDEX 583
Power ................................109
Jacking And Tire Changing....................405
Jacking Instructions .........................407
Jack Location .............................405
Jack Operation ......................405, 407, 458
Jump Starting .............................416
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm ..........................30
Disarm The Alarm ........................30
Keyless Entry ............................33
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........22, 28
Remote Keyless Entry ......................17
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .....19
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......22
Keyless Enter-N-Go..........................33
Enter The Trunk ..........................33
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ....................33
Passive Entry ............................33
Passive Entry Programming ..................33
Remote Control ..........................33
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ...............33
Unlock From The Passenger’s Side .............33
Keyless Entry ..............................17
Keys ....................................17
Replacement ..........................22, 28
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................59
LaneSense................................335
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................184
Latches..................................228
Lead Free Gasoline .........................492
Leaks, Fluid ..............................228
Life Of Tires ..............................472
Liftgate ................................97, 98
Closing ................................98
Opening ................................97
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .................67
Light Bulbs ...............................228
Lights...................................228
AirBag.........................130, 193, 226
Automatic Headlights ......................57
Automatic High Beam ......................57
Brake Assist Warning ......................154
Brake Warning ..........................130
Cruise .............................141, 142
Daytime Running .........................
56
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................56
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator ......132
584 INDEX
Exterior ...............................228
Fog ...................................58
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................367
Headlights ..............................55
Headlights On Reminder ....................58
Headlight Switch .........................55
High Beam ..............................56
High Beam/Low Beam Select .................56
Hill Descent Control Indicator ...............156
Instrument Cluster ........................55
Intensity Control ..........................59
Interior ................................59
Lights On Reminder .......................58
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........135
Park ..................................141
Passing ................................56
Seat Belt Reminder .......................133
Security Alarm ..........................133
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............173
Traction Control .........................154
Turn Signals ......................59, 141, 228
Vanity Mirror ............................55
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .132, 141
Loading Vehicle............................346
Tires..................................464
Locks
Child Protection ..........................39
Power Door .............................32
Low Tire Pressure System.....................173
Lubrication, Body ..........................446
Luggage Carrier ...........................114
Lug Nuts ................................491
Maintenance ...............................94
Maintenance Free Battery .....................441
Maintenance Schedule .......................431
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .135, 143
Manual
Service ................................576
Manual Transmission ....................242, 456
Fluid Level Check ........................456
Frequency Of Fluid Change .................456
Lubricant Selection .......................456
Shift Speeds ............................243
Master Cylinder
Brakes ................................454
Methanol ................................493
Mirrors
Heated .................................5
4
Outside ................................52
12
INDEX 585
Rearview ............................51, 367
Vanity .................................55
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .................................6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................173
Mopar Parts ..............................575
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................236
Occupant Restraints.........................181
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............492, 498
Oil Change Indicator ........................122
Reset .................................122
Oil, Engine............................442, 498
Capacity ...............................497
Change Interval .........................443
Checking ...........................440, 442
Dipstick ............................440, 442
Disposal ...............................444
Filter ..............................444, 498
Filter Disposal ...........................444
Materials Added To .......................444
Pressure Warning Light ....................133
Recommendation .....................443, 497
Viscosity ........................443, 444, 497
Oil Filter, Change ..........................444
Oil Filter, Selection..........................444
Oil Pressure Light ..........................133
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................142
Operating Precautions .......................142
Operator Manual
Owner’s Manual .......................5,576
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................52
Overheating, Engine ........................419
Paint Care................................483
Parking Brake .............................237
ParkSense
Front And Rear ..........................290
ParkSense Active Park Assist ..................307
ParkSense System, Rear ......................286
Personalized Main Menu .....................503
Pets ....................................224
Placar
d, Tire And Loading Information ...........464
Power
Brakes ................................490
Door Locks ..............................32
Inverter ...............................109
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............108
Sunroof ................................92
586 INDEX
Windows ...............................85
Power Seats
Forward ................................44
Rearward ...............................44
Recline .................................45
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................189
Preparation For Jacking ......................406
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................190
Radial Ply Tires ............................470
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............452
Radio Frequency
General Information ................22, 27, 29, 38
Radio Operation ...........................547
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...................65
Rear Camera ..............................341
Rear Cross Path............................163
Rear ParkSense System ...................286, 290
Rearview Mirror ............................51
Rear Window Defroster .......................67
Rear Wiper/Washer..........................67
Reclining Front Seats .........................42
Recreational Towing.........................358
Reformulated Gasoline.......................493
Refrigerant ...............................446
Reminder, Lights On .........................58
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................182
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................24
Remote Keyless Entry......................17, 18
Arm The Alarm ..........................30
Disarm The Alarm ........................30
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................33
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........22, 28
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ...........545
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features ......27
Uconnect Settings .........................27
Remote Starting System .......................24
Replacement Keys ........................22, 28
Replacement Tires ..........................473
Reporting Safety Defects .....................575
Restraints, Child ...........................208
Restraints, Head ............................48
Roll
Over Warning ...........................5
Roof Type Carrier ..........................114
Rotation, Tires.............................480
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................226
12
INDEX 587
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................228
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................575
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................225
Safety Information, Tire ......................458
Safety Tips ...............................224
Schedule, Maintenance.......................431
Seat Belt Reminder .........................133
Seat Belts .............................182, 226
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........188
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......188
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........190
Child Restraints .........................208
Energy Management Feature ................190
Front Seat .......................182, 184, 186
Inspection ..............................226
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................186
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................184
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............188
Operating Instructions .....................186
Pregnant Women .........................189
Pretensioners ...........................190
Rear Seat ..............................184
Reminder ..............................182
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................190
Seat Belt Reminder .......................182
Untwisting Procedure .....................188
Seat Belts Maintenance.......................486
Seats..................................40, 44
Adjustment ........................40, 41, 44
Head Restraints ..........................48
Rear Folding .............................40
Reclining ...............................42
Seatback Release ..........................41
Tilting ...............................40, 41
Security Alarm ..........................29, 133
Arm The System ..........................30
Disarm The
System ........................30
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............498
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................28
Sentry Key Replacement ....................22, 28
Service Assistance ..........................572
Service Contract ...........................574
Service Manuals ...........................576
Shifting
Manual Transmission ......................242
Shift Lever Override ........................420
Shoulder Belts.............................184
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................52
Signals, Turn ........................59, 141, 228
588 INDEX
Siri.....................................563
SiriusXM Guardian
Vehicle Health Alert .......................562
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................478
Snow Tires ...............................475
Spare Tires.........................475, 476, 477
Spark Plugs ..............................498
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) ..........................498
Oil...................................498
Speed Control
Distance Setting (ACC Only) ................266
Mode Setting (ACC Only) ..................266
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................263
Starting .................................233
Button .................................23
Cold Weather ...........................235
Engine Fails To Start ......................234
Remote ................................24
Starting And Operating ......................233
Starting Procedures .........................233
Steering
Tilt Column .............................50
Wheel, Heated ...........................50
Wheel, Tilt ..............................50
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................545
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .545
Storage, Vehicle.............................83
Stuck, Freeing .............................422
Sun Roof ...............................92, 94
Closing ................................93
Opening ................................93
Sun Visor Extension.........................106
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..........195
Sway Control, Trailer.....................149, 349
System, Remote Starting ......................24
Telescoping Steering Column ...................50
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............82
Tilt Steering Column .........................50
Time Delay
Headlight ...............................58
Tip Start .................................233
Tire And Loading Information Placard............464
Tire Markings .............................459
T
ires..........................228, 468, 475, 481
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................472
Air Pressure ............................468
Chains ................................478
Changing ...........................405, 458
12
INDEX 589
Compact Spare ..........................476
General Information ...................468, 475
High Speed .............................470
Inflation Pressure ........................469
Jacking ............................405, 458
Life Of Tires ............................472
Load Capacity .......................464, 465
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........136, 173
Quality Grading .........................481
Radial ................................470
Replacement ............................473
Rotation ...............................480
Safety .............................458, 468
Sizes .................................460
Snow Tires .............................475
Spare Tires ......................475, 476, 477
Spinning ...............................471
Trailer Towing ...........................354
Tread Wear Indicators .....................471
Tire Safety Information.......................458
Tire Service Kit ............................413
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................353
Tow Hooks
Emergency .............................426
Towing ..................................348
Disabled Vehicle .........................423
Guide .................................352
Recreational ............................358
Weight ................................352
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ....................149
Trailer Towing.............................348
Cooling System Tips ......................358
Hitches ................................351
Minimum Requirements ....................353
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................353
Wiring ................................356
Trailer T
owing Guide ........................352
Trailer Weight .............................352
Transmission
Automatic ..........................246, 456
Fluid .................................499
Manual ................................242
Transporting Pets ..........................224
Tread Wear Indicators .......................471
Turn Signals............................59, 141
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings ..................27, 506, 524
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . .27, 38, 506, 524
590 INDEX
Passive Entry Programming ..............38, 536
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................481
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector .....546
Unleaded Gasoline .........................492
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................188
Vanity Mirrors .............................55
Vehicle Loading ........................346, 465
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................6
Vehicle Storage .............................83
Viscosity, Engine Oil ........................444
Voice Command ...........................548
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................548
Warning Flashers, Hazard ....................367
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .139
Warnings And Cautions .......................6
Warnings, Roll Over ..........................5
Warranty Information .......................575
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................441
Washing Vehicle ...........................484
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................477
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................477
Wind Buffeting ........................88, 91, 93
Window Fogging ...........................84
Windows
Power .................................85
Windshield Defroster ........................226
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................446
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................446
Wipers, Intermittent .........................64
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ........................65
Wrecker Towing ...........................423
12
INDEX 591
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
First Edition V1
Printed in the U.S.A.
19BV-126-AA
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
